Está en la página 1de 306

Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.

13

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
USER’S MANUAL

ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

Copyright © 2002 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

Release Note:

[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00
1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Support ETHERNET Port(Port4) for EVRC2A
- Support IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)

[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10
1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Dialing Modem Support(add the setup menu)

[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12
1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Support IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
- Support Overfrequency Protection Element (add the setup menu)

[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00

After the Ver5.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N(Network type)”.
1. Support “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” function(add the setup menu).
This function is used to interface with ETIMS over Ethernet port.
2. Separate “Communication” setting into “Protocol” and “Port” settings.
3. Describe elements consisting of “Protection” section in order of the menu shown in LCD.
4. Add “CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored” in Frequency element.
5. Add the description related with “STATUS” menu omitted in the previous version.
6. Add the description related with “MAINTENANCE” menu omitted in the previous version.
7. Add “Fault Trip(option)” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.

[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10
1. Add contents of RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider), one of Voltage Divider Inputs.

[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11
1. Add “6.10. Set Group Change”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20
1. Add “Loss of Phase” in “PROTECTION” menu according to an additional function (option),
“Loss of Phase”.
2. Add “Supply Outage Measurement” as an additional function in menu.
- Add “S-Outage” and “S-O Dura” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ EVENT RECORDER” menu.
- Add “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED
DATA” menu.
- Add “S-OUTAGE COUNTER” in “MAINTENANCE” menu.
- Add “SUPPLY OUTAGE” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.

[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

After the Ver6.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N6(Network type)”.

[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00
1. Change the terms related with battery testing.

[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01
1. Add “Power Quality” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu.
2. Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in some menus.
- Change “S-Outage Counter” to “Power Quality” in “MAINTENANCE” menu.
- Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
- Change “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” to “P-Quality Count” and “P-Quality” in
“RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
3. Add “HARMONICS” in “MAIN MENU/6.METERING” menu.

[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A-N6 firmware V6.12 upgrading.
1. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding measuring function of
voltage/current unbalance.
- Change “METERING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.
- Change “Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy” in “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.
- Add “10.1.9. Unbalance”.
- Change “Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy” in “10.2. Accuracy”.
2. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding detection function of
voltage/current unbalance.
- Change “MONITORING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.

ii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

- Change “RECORDER” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.
- Add “Power Quality” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
- Change “SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER”, “POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER”,
“COUNTER” in “2.6. Recorder”.
- Change “Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree” in “3.2.1. Main Menu Summary”.
- Add settings for Unbalance in “6.10. Power Quality”.
- Add Unbalance Counter in “11.4. Power Quality”.
- Change “12.2. System Event Recorder”.
- Change “12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder”.
3. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding “Daily Max I” and “Daily Energy”
settings.
- Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
4. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of changed range of reclose interval 1.
- Change “Reclose interval 1” in “2.4. Protection Elements/ Reclose Control”.
- Change “Range of Reclose 1” in “7.1. Reclose(79)”.

[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_N6 firmware V6.15 upgrading.
1. Change “5.3. Clock”.
2. Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type”.
- Add “Set Type”, “GMT Sign”, “GMT Hour”, “GMT Min” and “Evt Send Type” set-up in
“RELAY SETUP/ TIME SET & DIS TYPE” menu.
3. Change “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
4. Change “9.3. Clock”.
5. Change “10.1.4. Synchro Voltage”.
6. Change “Table 14-1. Warning Events” in “14.1. Warning Events”.

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10
1. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.04 upgrading.
- Change “5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol – Option” : Add “Time Req(m)” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu.
- Change “5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232” : Add “Parity Bit”, “Data Bit” and “Stop Bit” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232” menu.
- Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” and “Evt Time Type” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC” menu.
- Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” set-up in “RELAY

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu.
2. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.06 upgrading.
- Change “5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” menu.
- Change “5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” menu.
- Change “6.3. Line VL Sensing” : Add “Install Type” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP / LINE
VL SENSING” menu.
3. Change the description for “SKIP at Fault” and “Fault ‘I’ Evt” setting in “5.2.5.
EVENT&ETC”.
4. Add the Note in “6.4. System Power”.

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12
1. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.07 upgrading : Delete “Tx Delay”
set-up in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu.
- Change the description for “Tx Delay” setting in “5.2.2.1. DNP3.0 Protocol – Option”.
2. Change the description for “TX Post Delay” and “TX Pre Delay” in “5.2.3.1. PORT2 –
RS232”.
3. Change the setting examples of “Use of VD(CVD or RVD)” in “6.2. Line VS Sensing / 6.2.3.
Setting Examples”.

[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12
1. Add the Note in “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option”.
2. Add the Note in “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
3. Change “Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)” in “7.18. Time
Overcurrent Curves”.

[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13
1. Add the Notes in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
2. Add the Note of “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
3. Add the Note of “SEF” setting in “7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
4. Add the Note in “9.4. Control Type”.

iv ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

......................................... 19 2......................RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6........................... 82 6....................................................................................... Summary of Features ....6...............7............. Recorder ...................................................... 78 5..... TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................... RELAY SETUP ...........3.....................................................1................ Communications..................................... 40 5............. 9 2..........................................................1....2..................................... 2 2....................... 37 4.................................6.................................................................2..................................... 79 5....... 11 2.................................. Passcode .................................................... SYSTEM SETUP ........................................ 23 3.......2....................................................... 16 2..........3...... Using the LCD Menu ..............................................................................................co.......... 1 1............ Line VL Sensing ....kr TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.................................................... Type Withstand Tests ............................................................. Clear Saved Data ...........................................entecene..................................8............................................................... 84 6................... Clock ............................................................................................................... Monitoring.................................................................... Time Set & Display Type – Option ............................... 8 2...............NT http://www....................................................................... 80 6........................2......................................1........................... 86 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v . SELECT SETBANK .......................................... 79 5............. 82 6........... 80 5................................................................. 76 5................................................... Communication ......... Event Recorder .....................................4........................................1...................................................................................................1....... 24 3................................ LCD Display ................................................. Gas Sensor Type ................................................................................................................5.......... USER INTERFACE PANEL ...................................................................... Metering Accuracy ........................................................................... INTRODUCTION ............ 5 2....................... Line VS Sensing ........... 41 5.................................................................................................4............................... 42 5..... Description ................................7.................................................................... 33 3.................................................................................................... Factory Debug ................................................................ 41 5..............3................... 5 2............................................................ Protection Elements................. 22 3...5......................................................... 1 1.. Current Sensing ........................................................................... Construction ...............................3.......................................2... Inputs and Outputs .......................................

............................... 144 7.................................... Recloser Wear ................ 120 7..............Option ............................................................................. Opto Input Set ..............................................................entecene.... 208 8.....co...................................................Option .............................16...............................12................................................................. 215 8.......6.........................7...............2.......................................... Fault Locator ....................7..........................9.........................................................................2............. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) ........................................................................... Gas Low Lock – Option .......... 211 8............................................... 116 7............... 146 7.................................. 208 8..... Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) .............Option .................................................. 172 7............. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) ............... 154 7. Frequency(81) ..............6................................................................................................................................................ Output Relay Set ........ 217 8............. 96 6....................................... 152 7................... 128 7....................... 91 6.... 115 6...................................................................................................................... 93 6....Option ... 88 6.......................................................................................9................................... 136 7..........5.... Set Group Change ...................................................... 218 8... Directional Controls (67)............4.. Battery Test................................................ Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) .................. 180 7.................................................................... Loop Control .................................................................. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) ............................................5.................... Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)................ 177 7..11........10........................................................NT http://www... Synchronism Check (25) ............... Other Element.................................................. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) .........13...18.................................................... Power Quality ................8..10........................................... Undervoltage (27)................ 170 7............................. 162 7.................................15...............14.....................................................1........................................RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6... 220 vi ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY ......... System Power ............................ Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) ................................... 138 7................................. 207 8.4.... Time Overcurrent Curves ............................................................... Cold Load Pickup ..... Panel Sleep Time .....................................kr 6.. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) ............. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) ........................................... 142 7........ Demand ................8..................3...................................................... Overvoltage (59)............................17.... 132 7..................................... 91 6.................5......................... Loss of Phase ................................................3..................Option .......... 150 7....................................................... 213 8....6..................Option ..........................................................................19.........................................4....1........................................ 148 7...................................................................................... MONITORING .............................7................................................................ Reclose (79). 122 7.......... PROTECTION .................................................................. 174 7............... Trip Counter .....................................................................................................................................................

...7....................... EXT’ Trip & Lock – Option ....................1................................................................................................... OPTO Inputs .... 226 10....... 247 12............................................... Wear Monitor.......... 221 9............................................ 222 9................. Fault Trip Event Recorder .......................................... 222 9.................. Accuracy ..........................2...........................................kr 8............ 237 11..... User Interface Door and Power Switch ....................................................NT http://www.......................................6.................................................................................................8.... MAINTENANCE .. Power Quality Event Recorder ......................................... 235 11................................................................. METERING ........................................... 254 13.......1......................................................... Mount Accessories Dimensions .............................2........................9......... 262 13.............. Load Profile .................................. Inner Structure ...................................... 237 11....................9...................... 225 10................. Output Relay Test ................................................... STATUS ....................... Clock ..........................................................................................4......................................................................................................................3........................ Diagnostic Event Recorder... Relay Outputs ..................................5.............................................................................. 268 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii ......................................................................... 241 12...................................................... 250 12............ Vent and Outer Cover .....................1...............3....... 241 12.....Option ........................................ 257 13........ System Event Recorder ......................10..................... EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type ............................................. 252 12.............. Live Load Block – Option ............................ 265 13.... Power Quality .................................................................. Terminal Block and Fuses ................. 237 11.. 245 12.............................................. 222 9..... 238 11...................................................................... Side Panel .............................. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .............................VT Type ...............entecene..3......... User-Available DC Power ...........6.......................................... Counters............................................................ 220 8........................................................................................... INSTALLATION ............................................. 267 13..........5...................................................................................................................1......... Waveform Capture ...........................................................2.........2................................................... 259 13...................8......co................... 239 12.......................... 263 13.............................. 261 13........................................................4.................................. EVENT RECORDER............................................11........................................... Earth Wiring Diagram .............................4......................1...Option..... 224 10........................................ Control Type .. 257 13.................2.................................................................................. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram ............................................................................... 264 13. 266 13........................ Metering Elements . 223 9.. 258 13............3...........................................Option .............................................................4............................................................................................................................................................RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6..........

.............36................................25.................... 292 13........ Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ............ 294 14.12........................................................................... 293 14.........RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6..................... 294 14........ 290 13................................................ 275 13... Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling.......... 289 13.......................... Main Board ........................................................................................................... Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ..........................13............................ AC Power Cable ..............................28.................... Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact . Hardware Block Diagram ................. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram ...........................................................................................35................................................................................................34.kr 13............................................................. 279 13.. 288 13..............15........................37..................................................................... Recloser Trip and Close Coil.......................entecene................ VT Wiring Diagram ..... 281 13................. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ..................................... 278 13............................18............................ Communication Cables ....................................... 282 13...............14........................................................................ Communications .................16........................................................................................... 285 13.............................................................................. Warning Events .......................................... Battery Change ....................................................................................................1.....................17............................................... 275 13...19..................................... Malfunction Events ... Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ....... 270 13........................... VD Wiring Diagram ................................... 273 13........... 292 13...................... Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ...................38........ Charge Circuit . 276 13.................................2..............26....................... 269 13............... 296 viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .. Analog Board..31............ 278 13......................................... 286 13........ 284 13........................ Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................................................................... Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ... 276 13.......................................................22.33................30.......... 272 13... 283 13..... Battery and Control run time .........................................................................20.....................................................................32...........................23......... MAINTANANCE ................ 289 13.......21..... Recloser Test Kit ................................................ AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ......... 278 13.............................................. Battery Protection .................................................................................................. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ............................................................27........................................29..............24................... Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ........ 287 13............................................. 271 13....................... 277 13.... Fuses .........NT http://www..............................co...................................................................39..............................

112. and measured system parameters. Hot line tag.1. maximum demand levels.NT http://www. Reclose Enabled. Control Locked. and energy metering is also performed. McGraw Edison. Remote enabled. y EVRC2A provides protection. INTRODUCTION 1. and monitoring functions with both local and remote. y EVRC2A contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37. y In order to perform the protection function.co. Users can select any time of current curve simply by programming and modifying.Option) which fundamentally installed.entecene. y Recording of past trip. and also control EVRC2A with key buttons on the user interface panel. IEC255-3.kr 1. Ground Enabled. acquisition of event data. SEF Enabled. and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution. y Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit . Protection Enabled. Alternate-settings.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Description y EVRC2A with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best quality of electric service. y Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings. control. y Users can operate Close and Trip. alarm or control events. line voltage and current signal filtered with analog filter and digital DFT full-cosin filter is used. and management of operation history. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1 . Program 1. It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions. Program 2.

Ic.entecene.kr 1.NT http://www.2. Ground and Sensitive Ground Current and Phasors y Line and Phase Voltage and Phasors(Source Side and Load Side) y Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component Phasors y Frequency Magnitude and Rate y Synchronizing Voltage. Delta ㎐ and Delta Leg y Single and Three Phase Power(MW.co.Option METERING y Phase. Ground. Mvar. MVA) y Voltage and current harmonics . Ib.Option 2 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .Option y Loss of Phase . PF) y Energy(MWh. MVA. Mvar.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. MW. Phasor and Frequency y Synchronizing Delta㎸. Mvarh) y Maximum Demand(Ia. Summary of Features PROTECTION y Phase Instantaneous Over-current Element y Phase Time Over-current Elements y Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Ground Instantaneous Over-current Element y Ground Time Over-current Elements y Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Sensitive Earth Fault Elements y Negative Instantaneous Over-current Element y Negative Time Over-current Elements y Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Phase. Sensitive Earth and Negative Sequence Directional Control y Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots) y Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control y Sequence Coordination Control y Two Under-voltage Elements y Two Over-voltage Elements y Under-frequency Element y Over-frequency Element y Loop Control .Option y Voltage and current unbalance .

kr MONITORING y Fault Locator y Demand trip and alarm(Ia.entecene. MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol – Option y Side panel PORT4 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.Option y Side panel PORT3 RS485 or R232* Serial Port : DNP 3. Ig.NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user.Option NOTE : According to a recloser type.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 3 .co.NT http://www.Option y Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure . the Port3 type of EVRC2A-N6.NT. MODBUS or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol and EVRC2A interface software – Option NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port.0. MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol .0. Ib. COMMUNICATIONS y Front Panel PORT1 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software y Side panel PORT2 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software . In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6. However.0. there may be no gas pressure monitoring. the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected. DNP 3. Ic. I2) y Trip Counter Limit y Synchronism Check y Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase) y Recloser Operation Failure y Voltage Transformer Failure y Battery Automatic Load Test y Breaker Failure with Current Supervision y Power Quality .

battery status.Option y 7 Programmable Relays y 1 Programmable Alarm Relay AUXILIARY INPUTS .Option y 8 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs 4 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .last 213days y Fault Waveform .kr RECORDER y Trip and fault counter y Supply outage counter and time – Option y Sag/Swell detection counter – Option y Voltage and current unbalance detection counter .last 512 events . sequence status.Option USER INTERFACE y Fault indicators y Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage y Dual Functional keypads y 20×4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display) y 32 LED indicators .Fault indications.last 512 events y Load profile recorder .Option y System event recorder .15 cycles × 32 events y Fault trip event recorder .co.entecene.last 512 events . etc y RS232 port y Context Help Messages y Access Security(Passcode) AUXILIARY OUTPUTS .last 2048 events y Diagnostic event recorder .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.Option y Power Quality event recorder .NT http://www.

-15%) y Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc y Based on user requirement.Phase Resistance value : 100MΩ ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 5 .NT http://www. 27㎸. 15.1. 24Vdc y DC Power Continuous : 40W y DC Power for 60Sec : 60W Voltage Divider Inputs (VD) .kr 2.0015 VA y System Voltage : 15㎸.Option y DC Power Voltage : 12.co.Standard „ Capacitor Voltage Divider Inputs (CVD) – Only EVR y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V y Burden : 2e-6 VA y System Voltage : 15㎸. Inputs and Outputs Systems y 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.Option User available DC power Output .entecene. 800 Amp maximum Frequency y 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation Control Voltage Input y AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%. 38㎸ y Capacitor value . prepare 110V/220V Selectable Switch . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2. 27㎸ y Resistance value . 38㎸ maximum.Phase Capacitor value : 20㎊ „ Resistance Voltage Divider Inputs (RVD) – Only EPR y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V y Burden : Bow 0.

6A 1 second „ Burden : 0.+30%) y Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages 6 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . 0.2VA(220V).VB. 0.VS.38VA(1A) y SEF Input Current Range „ 0.05A Nominal „ 0.VT y Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V y Burden: 0. 0.Source Voltage 2 VR.16A Continuous „ 0.05VA(120V).Option y Control Inputs 8 Channel y Nominal Voltages and Operating Range „ 250Vdc(-15%.NT : 6 Channel .IB.+20%) „ 24Vdc(-15%.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. VC and VL) „ EVRC2A-N6.co.kr Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) .IB. SEF y IA.02VA(67V) Current Transformer Inputs (CT) y Current Inputs IA.IC.NT http://www. VB.6VA(300V).IG Input Current Range „ 1A Nominal „ 2A continuous „ 25A 1 second „ Burden : 0.VC .+20%) „ 125Vdc(-15%.+20%) „ 12Vdc(-10%.Option y Voltage Inputs „ EVRC2A-N : 4 Channel(VA.Source Voltage 1 VA.entecene.+20%) „ 48Vdc(-15%.0375VA(0.IC and IG.05A) Control Inputs .

NT http://www.entecene.4) 125Vac 5A ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 7 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.Option y Control Outputs 8 Channel „ Normal Open 5 Channel „ Normal Close 2 Channel „ ALARM 1 Channel y 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection y Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉) y Maximum operating power 125Vdc 0.8A 24Vdc 3A 250Vac 3A (cosΦ=0.1A (L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.co.kr Control Output Contacts .

2×50㎲).NT http://www.2. 3㎄(8×20㎲) Surge Withstand Capability y IEEE C37.standard y VFD : -40℃∼+85℃(-40℉∼+185℉) .1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems (3㎸ oscillatory 1㎒ to 1.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.5㎒.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference Transceivers.kr 2. Class 2. 10 V/m (150㎒ and 450㎒. Control Power inputs. Part 21 : Vibration.Vibration tests (sinusoidal).co. 5㎸ fast transient 1.1 .1988 Electrical relays. Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers.entecene. VT inputs. Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs „ 2㎸(60㎐) for 1 minute Impulse Voltage y IEEE C62. shock. Section One . Type Withstand Tests Dielectric Strength y CT inputs.90. Control Operating Temperature y Operating range : -25℃∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉) y LCD : -20℃∼+70℃(-4℉∼+158℉) .2 .1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard. 6㎸(1. 5 W transmitter 10㎝) Vibration Test y IEC 255-21-1 .90.2×50㎲) y IEEE C37. bump. and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment.option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display) 8 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .

entecene.02 –1.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.000 to 32. 3V0 ㎸ ±1% Phase A.NT http://www. C WATT-HOURS MWH ±2% –32000 to 32000 3Φ Phase Phase A.kr 2.000 3Φ Phase 3ΦREACTIVE Phase A. C MVar ±2% –32. 3Φ Real Power MW ±2% – A/B/C. C VAR-HOURS MVarH ±2% –32000 to 32000 3Φ Phase Phase A/B/C/RG Current A ±2% DEMAND A/B/C.000 3Φ Phase Phase A.000 POWER 3Φ Phase Phase A. C 3ΦREAL POWER MW ±2% –32. B.3. B.000 to 1.co. 3I0 A ±1% of 2×CT – COMPONENTS V1. so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental components only except the measurement of harmonics. C POWER FACTOR Rate ±0. Metering Accuracy(1/2) Measurements Parameters Unit Accuracy Range Phase A RMS Current Phase B RMS Current CURRENT Phase C RMS Current A ±1% of 2×CT 20×CT Phase G RMS Current Phase SEF RMS Current A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage VOLTAGE ㎸ ±1% – R–N (R–S) RMS Voltage S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage* T–N (T–R) RMS Voltage* SYMMETRICAL I1. 3Φ Reactive Power MVar ±2% ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 9 . B.000 to 32. Table 2-1. B. B. B. Metering Accuracy The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current parameters.000 POWER 3Φ Phase 3ΦAPPARENT Phase A. C MVA ±2% –32. V2.000 to 32. I2.

10 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.00 R-N (R-S) Load Voltage 1st~7th Harmonic of Current ±1% 0% to 100% st th 1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage ±1% 0% to 100% HARMONICS – THD of Current ±3% 0% to 100% THD of Voltage ±3% 0% to 100% Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side ±2% 0% to 999% UNBALANCE Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side % ±2% 0% to 999% Current unbalance(I2/I1) ±2% 0% to 999% If the VT connection type is set to delta.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy(2/2) Measurements Parameters Unit Accuracy Range A-N (A-B) Source Voltage FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.entecene.00~70.NT http://www.02 40. all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.

..... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ...................................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max) 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳ ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 11 .. 0....00 to 10.............. 96 to 98% of Pickup Curve Type „ ANSI : Moderately.............NT) Pickup Level Accuracy...........RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 2..... 0................ Instantaneous/Linear Low Set Definite Time ..... 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A Dropout Level .......... Extremely.... U2.................................. 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................. ± 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳ Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection Pickup Level............... OFF.......00 to 10.......... 0...................................00 in steps of 0....... OFF..........00 to 10....01s Active Trip .... Short Inverse...................... Very......co................................................... U3.... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A Dropout Level ......................................................................................................................................00 in steps of 0...................... 5% Timing Accuracy ................ 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........ Protection Elements Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection Pickup Level.......................00 in steps of 0...... U4 „ McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37 Time dial ....... OFF...... Normally...... Very. Long Very Inverse „ User programmable curves : U1..........05 to 15................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Pickup Level Accuracy...............................................03 of EVRC2A-N6.................................................. Very.entecene........ Extremely....................00 to 10....................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max) 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳ Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection Pickup Level......................................................................... Short Inverse „ ESB : Normally.........00 in steps of 0............................NT http://www..01s Reset Type ...........................................01s Active Trip ......................10s) „ IEC : Standard........... 5% Timing Accuracy ... 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s (supported from Ver 6................. 0.. 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Pickup Level Accuracy................01s Minimum Response time ....................................01 Time adder............................................ 0....... Long............. Definite Time (1s ...............4..............00 in steps of 0.................

...... the “Pickup Level” setting range of the protection element is “OFF..00 in steps of 0..01 Reset time from lockout ......15) Dropout Level ..........................................co..........RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6....................phase trip................................phase trip ....00 in steps of 0.......00 to 600...NT http://www......11) 0......00 in steps of 0............. 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 1 .....0 in steps of 0.00 to 600........... 1.............00 in steps of 0........... Reclose Control Operations to Lockout .......01(from Ver 6.......... 1..... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout .ground trip .................................SEF trip ... 1..... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................... 0.......................................................01(prior to Ver 6.10 to 600...01 Timing Accuracy .......00 to 600...........00 to 600...50 to 600.......01 Reclose interval 4 ........00 in steps of 0............... 1 to 160 in steps of 1A(from Ver 6.1A”.............. 1..................ground trip .... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve ......00 in steps of 0.................entecene.01 Reclose interval 3 ................01 Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle......... 5% Timing Accuracy ........................00 in steps of 0.........01s Pickup Level Accuracy ....... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve ... 0........................... ± 5% 12 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY ......15) OFF..... 1.......... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve .............Negative Seq’ trip ... 4 to 160 in steps of 1A(prior to Ver 6........ at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max) 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳ NOTE As per the user’s request. for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed..............00 in steps of 0......... To check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed.......00 to 600.....................OFF...00 to 600.........kr Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Pickup Level*NOTE ........................................................Negative Seq’ trip ............................11) Reclose interval 2 ................ 0.......... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout ........................ check “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu....... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout .....1 to 16........................

...............................1 Cold Load Pickup Time Duration .... 0....................... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A Ground Pickup Level ...0 in steps of 0....................00 to 600........................................... the “SEF Pickup Level” setting range of the protection element is “0..................... 5% Timing Accuracy ...00 to 1.......kr Cold Load Pickup Blocking Cold Load Pickup Trigger ....................................................... 52A(Close) or Load Current Phase Pickup Level .............. 1.........00 in steps of 0.................01s Restore Minimum Time ................... Phase Directional Control Polarizing Voltage .. for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed....................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ...00 to 600............................................... 1.......... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ... 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ............................................................................co........... Zero Sequence Voltage Vo For voltage element polarizing the source VTs must be connected in Wye Maximum Torque Angle ..........25 in steps of 0............................... 95 to 98% of Nominal Pickup Outage Time ........0 to 5........... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A Reset Level ............................................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ...... To check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed....................................................................... 0.....................01s Reset Time .....................5cycle ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 13 ................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max) 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳ NOTE As per the user’s request............................. 0................00 in steps of 0. Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Maximum Torque Angle .....01 x VT Angle Accuracy .............................RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6... 4 to 2000 in steps of 1A Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ............ 0.......... 1............................... OFF............0 in steps of 0....... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A SEF Pickup Level*NOTE .....5cycle Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control Polarizing Voltage ............................ check “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu..............00 to 1.............. 1 to 720 in steps of 1min Pickup Level Accuracy....................01s Cold Load Pickup Multiplier........00 to 600..............................NT http://www...........................................entecene.........00 in steps of 0..01 x VT Angle Accuracy ......... 0..............25 in steps of 0.............1A”......................4 to 200...

... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay .01 x VT Dropout Level ............1sec Level Accuracy ................00 to 600........................0 to 6000.............................5cycle Undervoltage 1/2 Protection Pickup Level ......25 in steps of 0..... 0..............25 in steps of 0............entecene.............................01 x VT Minimum Voltage .......... 0......01 x VT in Phase A Minimum Current ... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay .............................. 0................ Any One/Any Two/All Three Timing Accuracy ... 102 to 105% of Pickup Time Delay ..........kr Negative Directional Control Polarizing Voltage .....RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.. 0...02㎐........00 to 600............ at VD ± 0...............01 x VT Angle Accuracy ............. at VT ± 0....00 to 600........00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.......................................02㎐ at VD Pickup ±0.......... ± 20㎳ Under/Over frequency Minimum Voltage .00 to 1...00 to 1.........01 x VT Dropout Level ........................ Negative Sequence Voltage V2 Maximum Torque Angle..............................NT http://www............................................. 50....................................................... 2cycle 14 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .............................................05㎐ Timing Accuracy .......................................................... Any One/Any Two/All Three Timing Accuracy ...01s(definite time) Normal frequency CLOSE function ....................................00 in steps of 0............................................................................................. 0................................................................ at VT Pickup ±0................................................................................................................................05㎐ Under/Over frequency Time Delay ........25 in steps of 0. 0.01㎐ Dropout Level ..............00 to 1.............co.. 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ..........................00 to 1..............................................25 in steps of 0........... OFF/ON Normal frequency CLOSE time delay ......... 1....01s Active Phases ..... 0...00 in steps of 0.......................01㎐ Over frequency Pickup Level ................................ ± 20㎳ Overvoltage 1/2 Protection Pickup Level ......25 in steps of 0...... 40................................... 0................. 0.......................00 to 70........................00 in steps of 0.......0 in steps of 0.........................00 in steps of 0...................01s Active Phases .........................00 to 1.................... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A in Phase A Under frequency Pickup Level ........

.............10 to 100..........00 in steps of 0..01 x VT Dropout Level .......... ± 20㎳ ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 15 ....entecene...........................25 in steps of 0..RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6...... 0...........................co...Option Pickup Level..........................01s Time Accuracy ..............kr Loss of Phase ........... 102 to 105% of Pickup Time Delay ...... 0.......................................NT http://www...................................................00 to 1....

................1 Rate System ............... ± 5% Synchronism Check Dead Voltage Maximum ..............RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.............. OFF.... T of Load side Trip Counters Number of Pickup Limit................................................................0 to 100... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A Ground Pickup Level.................. 1 to 7 in steps of 1day 16 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .......................00 to 1.......00 to 5...... 30 or 60 min......01 Synchro-check Phase....................... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A Level Accuracy .......................... 0..01 x VT Live Voltage Maximum .................................25 in steps of 0.................. 27㎸................................................ 0......................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1 Recloser Wear Pickup Wear.................. 0 to 100% in steps of 0...co.............................. 5.......................... 20...........................0 to 100.............00 to 1............ 15㎸................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1 Trip Counter Set ..0 % in steps of 0. OFF.kr 2...... OFF................. Monitoring Demand Measured Values.....25 in steps of 0.0 % in steps of 0... R(AB)........ 0..........................25 in steps of 0....... Phase A/B/C/G Current(A) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Real Power(MW) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Reactive Power(Mvar) Measurement Type ..00㎐ in steps of 0.....................1 Number of Maximum Interruption .NT http://www..............0 to 100.....entecene........ 0 to 100° in steps of 1° Maximum Frequency Difference .........0 to 50..............................................................0 % in steps of 0........ Phase Pickup Level .... 0. 10...... 5...................... 0.. OFF............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1 Set Phase A Wear ................. 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ...................01 x VT Maximum Angle Difference .............. 0.....5........................................................................................................1 Battery Test Period for automatically check a battery .....0㎸ in steps of 0....................................... 15.. 0.................. 38㎸ Rate Interrupt(㎸) .. S(CB).......... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand Time Constant ............01 x VT Maximum Voltage Difference ................................................1 Set Phase C Wear.....00 to 1...............1 Set Phase B Wear.............

. DISABLE......3................. Gas Low Lock ....NT...kr Fault Locator Total Length of Feeder ................6. DISABLE.....9 of 0...1 to 6000........... DISABLE....... 0...0 of 0... .7 or 8 Reset Method .. LOCAL.................................. 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle Detect Function of Voltage Unbalance......... ENABLE Detect Level of Current Unbalance ............................95 in steps of 0.............. ......4....05 to 1........ ENABLE Supply Outage Duration .......Option Detect Function of Supply Outage............ 1 to 3600 in steps of 1s Detect Function of Voltage Sag.... 1.....................................1 to 6000.......1 to 60.. ................. 0.......1 to 60..... .......................................0 in steps of 0................1ohms Power Quality ...... 0..... Opto Input 1. DISABLE....... 1 to 100 in steps of 1% Detect Time of Current Unbalance... ENABLE Detect Level of Voltage Swell. 0.............25 in steps of 0..0 of 0...1s Limit Current to Detect Current Unbalance ............... 0.......................... ENABLE Detect Level of Voltage Unbalance .........1s Detect Function of Current Unbalance.. DISABLE.1 to 6000......................12 of EVRC2A-N6.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6..... ENABLE Detect Level of Voltage Sag..................1 to 99.............0 of 0....1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ....... 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle Detect Function of Voltage Swell............01 x VT Detect Time of Voltage Sag..... 0.................... ............0 in steps of 0... 1 to 100 in steps of 1% Detect Time of Voltage Unbalance .1bar External Trip & Lock ..... ........................1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq............... 1 to 630 in steps of 1A Level Accuracy..2..............NT http://www....co............Option Use Input Port ...............01 x VT Detect Time of Voltage Swell....entecene........................ .................. .......... ± 5% NOTE : The setting for voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.1km Real impedance of the feeder positive seq....... ......... 0......1 to 6000...1ohms Real impedance of the feeder zero seq.... 0.... 0.......................0 of 0.......................................... .30 to 0...... .Option Pickup Low Level ...........5... LOCAL&REMOTE ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 17 ............

....................90 in steps of 0...........00 to 600.......... ± 20㎳ 18 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY ........................ 0.........................co.........kr Live Load Blocking .................. 0....01 x VT in Load side Dropout Level .............entecene.....Option Blocking Pickup Voltage .........................RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6..........10 to 0..........01s Timing Accuracy ...NT http://www......................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay .....00 in steps of 0................

NT http://www.6. V2(Load) „ Power Quality detect.co. 85 logic input states.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 8ch Input y Sample Rate : 16 per cycle y Trigger Position : 1 to 15cycle y Storage capacity : 32 events with 15cycle SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER y Trigger Source „ Protection Elements „ 52A Contact „ Sequence status „ Front panel control „ AC supply „ External control „ Fail operation „ External input status „ System alarm „ V1(Source).entecene. etc. y Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle y Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout y Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 19 . Recorder WAVEFORM CAPTURE y Trigger Source „ Protection pickup Elements „ Trip command active y Data Channels „ 5 currents. 4 voltages.kr 2. 8ch output relays.

B. Reference Voltage1. G) „ Demand Real Power(A. Battery. C. there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status. 60minute y Storage Capacity : Total 5120 Events. Reference Voltage 2) „ Sleep Mode „ Power Down Mode(Charge Volt High Alarm) „ Setting Change „ Gas Status „ Alarm Status.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. C. NOTE : According to a recloser type. 30.entecene. ±12V.co. 15. FAULT TRIP EVENT RECORDER . +5V) „ A/D Conversion(A/D Fail.NT http://www. 3ф) „ Demand Reactive Power(A. 213days/60min. 3ф) „ Demand Power Factor(3ф) „ Demand Energy( 3ф) „ Trigger Time : 5.kr DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER y Trigger Source „ System Power(AC. SEF phase and Negative Sequence „ Current[A] each phase when fault occurs y Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle y Trigger type : fault occurrence y Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events 20 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . etc. 20. y Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle y Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout y Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events LOAD PROFILE y Trigger Source „ Demand Current(A. B. B. B.C. 10.Option y Trigger Source „ Trigger elements : A. C.G.

000 .entecene.0 to 100.12 of EVRC2A-N6.0% y Phase B Wear : 0.Option y Trigger Source „ Trigger elements : Source.534 y System Restart Counter : 0 to 65.0 to 100.000 . Load y Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle y Trigger type : supply outage occurrence.534 y Supply Outage Counter : 0 to 60.000 . y Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events COUNTER y Trip Counter : 0 to 65. sag occurrence.NT.Option y Current Unbalance Counter : 0 to 60.000 – Option y Voltage Unbalance(Source Side) Counter : 0 to 60.534 y Fault Counter : 0 to 65. swell occurrence.000 .0% y Phase C Wear : 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER . current unbalance occurrence NOTE : The detection of voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.co.Option RECLOSER WEAR y Phase A Wear : 0.999 hours .0 to 100.Option y Voltage Unbalance(Load Side) Counter : 0 to 60. voltage unbalance occurrence.NT http://www.0% ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 21 .Option y Sag Counter : 0 to 60.Option y Swell Counter : 0 to 60.000 .Option y Supply Outage Time : 0 to 9.

1 Stop bit Front Panel Port1 EVRC2A Interface software RS232. Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol and EVRC2A Interface software RJ-45.NT.0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 1 Stop bit Side panel Port3 – Option DNP 3. No Parity.entecene.NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. No Parity. the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected. 57600bps. No Parity. 10BASE-T/100BASE-T Side panel Port4 – Option DNP 3. 1 Stop bit Side panel Port2 . 8 Data bits. Communications RS232.Option DNP 3.0. and EVRC2A Interface software NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port.0. 8 Data bits.NT http://www. 8 Data Bits. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6. the Port3 type of EVRC2A-N6. 1200-19200bps. Modbus or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol. 1200-19200bps. However. Communications Table 2-2. Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol and EVRC2A Interface software RS485 or RS232*.co.7.kr 2. 22 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .

y Directly control the recloser y Verify control status y View system status y View metering value y View information stored in the EVRC2A unit y View and change the EVRC2A settings Figure 3-1.entecene. USER INTERFACE PANEL This section describes the User Interface Panel (front-panel) The User interface Panel control is used for.co.kr 3. User Interface Panel ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 23 .NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser.kr 3.NT http://www. Operation Section 24 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .1. Units operating with firmware version 2.co.entecene. Figure 3-2.00 to 600. CLOSE Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser. POSITION LED Indicates the position of the Recloser.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of 0. Construction Panel consists of 8 sections as below. Operation Section OPEN Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.1.1. y Operation section y Local control section y Fault indication section y Voltage elements section y Sequence status section y System diagnostic section y Battery test section y Menu control section 3.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay.

Local Control Section All indicators show status of Control function. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable. The indicators are continuously ON when the control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is DISABLE.entecene. Local Control Section Primary Setting is enabled PROGRAM 1 Program 1 function is disabled PROGRAM 2 Program 2 function is disabled HOT LINE TAG Hot Line Tag function is disabled ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 25 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 3.1.2. PROTECTION ENABLED All Protection elements are enabled GROUND ENABLED Ground Protection elements are enabled SEF ENABLED SEF Protection elements are disabled RECLOSE ENABLED Reclose function is enabled CONTROL LOCKED Front panel function is unlocked REMOTE ENABLED Remote control is enabled ALTERNATE SETTINGS Alternate setting is disabled Figure 3-3.NT http://www.co.

When Alternate Enabled LED is off. the Alternate setting is activated. the primary setting is activated.entecene. ground protection elements and SEF element are operated individually. the reclose(79) element is enabled.kr Protection Enabled When illuminated. the ground over-current elements are enabled. The front panel LED will illuminate on each source of all protection enabling. Battery Load Test and menu control section can be normally operated. all functions in operation section and all functions in Local control section are locked. NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked. The enabled Ground can be disabled by pressing the Ground Enabled push-button on the front panel. the Sensitive Earth Fault(SEF) element is enabled. Lamp Test. Ground Enabled When Ground Enable LED is ON. Reclose Enabled When Reclose Enable LED is on. The enabled reclose element can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel. Alternate Enabled When Alternate Enabled LED is on.0. The protection enabled condition can be disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel. all remote control functions (e.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 26 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button on the front panel.g. SCADA system) are enabled. Remote Enabled When Remote Enabled LED is on. NOTE : Although all protection elements are enabled. OPEN.co. all protection elements are enabled. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3. Control Locked When Control Locked LED is on. SEF Enabled When SEF Enable LED is on. This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel. The enabled SEF can be disabled by pressing the SEF Enabled push-button on the front panel.

y Phase Instantaneous over-current Elements y Phase Time over-current Elements y Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Ground Instantaneous over-current Elements y Ground Time over-current Elements y Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Sensitive Ground Time Over-current Elements y Negative Instantaneous over-current Elements y Negative Time over-current Elements y Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element y Phase. Manufacturer sets a function in Program2. Neutral. and Negative Sequence Directional Control Figure 3-4.1. Manufacturer sets a function in Program1.3.entecene. Sensitive Ground.kr Program 1 A function installed in Program1 is operated when Program1 LED is On. Hot Line Tag When Hot Line Tag LED is on. Fault Indication Section ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 27 . Fault Indication Section Indicates current on the phase or neutral lines is above the minimum pickup setting as programmed in any of the EVRC2A over-current elements. the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Program 2 A function installed in Program2 is operated when Program2 LED is On. Depending on user’s request. Depending on user’s request.co. Ground. 3.NT http://www.

NT http://www. y Two Under voltage Elements y Two Over voltage Elements y Synchronism Element y Under/Over frequency Element 27 : Under voltage pickup 59 : Over voltage pickup 25 : Synchronism check pickup 81 : Under/Over frequency pickup Figure 3-5.kr TRIP TYPE y INST : Shows high current trip (50-1) y DELAY : Shows delay trip(51) y HIGH CURR’ : Shows high current lockout(50-2) FAULT INDICATION y A.4. Voltage Elements Section 28 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Voltage Elements Section Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. C : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines y G : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line y SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line y FI RESET : Reset fault indication/Lamp test 3. B.1.entecene.

CONTROL RUN Status of EVRC2A systems shows normal SELF CHECK Status of EVRC2A systems shows warning Figure 3-7.NT http://www.1. Sequence Status Section Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.kr 3. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 29 .1.6. System Diagnostic Section Indicates Diagnostic status of the EVRC2A.5. Self Check (Red) indicates the EVRC2A has failed in its internal diagnostic test. System Diagnostic Section NOTE : Control Run LED is blinking when system functional status is normal.co. Control run indicates (green) the EVRC2A has successfully passed its internal diagnostic test.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. RESET : Sequence shows resetting CYCLE : Sequence shows running LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout Figure 3-6.entecene. Sequence Status Section 3.

co. Battery Test Mode LOAD(V) : On Test.C-HI : When the charge circuit is over 29V .C-OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29V . . AC SUPPLY Status of supplying the external AC power.50 STATUS : B-OK C-OK LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.00 Push-button for battery load test. Figure 3-9. STATUS : Display Battery status and charge circuit status. Battery is disconnected from the charge circuit and connect the battery with load resistor and check the battery. AC supply indicates the EVRC2A has external power source.B-DF : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V . BATTERY LOAD TEST [BATTERY TEST MODE] LOAD(V) : 25. 30 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . CHARGE[V] : Display the voltage of charge circuit.C-LO : When the charge circuit is below 25V NOTE : All information above is provided by remote mode.7. Load resistor shall be connected with AC supply.1. Battery Test Section Indicates the system power status of the EVRC2A.B-LO : When the battery voltage is below 15V .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. CHARGE Figure 3-8.B-HI : When the battery voltage is over 28V .B-OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V . Discharge indicates the EVRC2A has failed in battery load testing.kr 3. DISCHARGE Status of discharged battery. Charge indicates the EVRC2A is charging Battery. Battery Test Section Status of charging the battery.entecene.NT http://www. CHARGE(V): 26.

operable in menu starting mode [▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode [◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu. operable in menu starting mode [FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode [ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level [ENT] : To select sub menu or data input Figure 3-10.kr 3. LCD DISPLAY 4x20 Characters display CONTROL KEYS [▲] [▼] [◀] [▶] Arrow keys are used for moving through the menu window and the changing of the setting value [▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu.1.NT http://www.8.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Menu Control Section The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the EVRC2A displays four lines of twenty characters each.co. operable in menu starting mode [▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu.entecene. Menu Control Section ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 31 .

NT http://www. Enter key is also used to accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key. [ESC] Key The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu. [◀] [▶] Key Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor in the data input mode and change display message. 32 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . PORT1 PORT1 is the port to communicate whit an Interface Software.kr [FUN] Key Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings.co. [▲] [▼] Key Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value in the data input mode. [FUN] key is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display. [ENT] Key ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Communication frame between EVRC2A and a master can be monitored and saved by using “DNP Frame Monitor” menu of the Interface Software.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene.

Select Setbank Consists of Primary. EVRC2A Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.entecene. Main Menu Summary EVRC2A has 6 Setting Menu BANKs which can be changed individually. y When cursor is in top menu. LCD Display y 20 x 4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display) y All menus are arranged in rotation algorithm. y Edit : Select a BANK to edit. Figure 3-11.2. Main Menu Tree 3. Press [Alternate Enabled] button and make the lamp on.kr 3. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 33 . y Displays Context Help Message.2.2. BANK in Primary Setting Menu is applied to System.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. Edit. 3. BANK in Alternate Setting/EditBank Setting Menu is not applied to System. EditBank Setting is used for setting value.NT http://www. you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation Menu Algorithm. if you press [▲] key. Alternate. y Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a BANK to apply in the system. y Primary : Select BANK to be applied to System.1.2. Alternate setting Menu is applied to the system.

3. CLEAR SAVED DATA.2. COMMUNICATION. SYSTEM SETUP Consists of CURRENT SENSING.3. METERING) 34 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Editbank Setting The same as “PRIMARY SETTING” 3. LINE (VS. CLOCK : Shows the present time.7.kr 3. 3. MONITORING Set items related to measurement and maintenance.entecene. SAVE SETTINGS Save all changed values. Alternate Setting The same as “PRIMARY SETTING” 3. GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME SET&DIS TYPE.5. PANEL SLEEP TIME.4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. SYSTEM POWER. OUTPUT RELAY SET. RELAY OUTPUTS : Shows status of Output port.6. For more details. Status OPTO INPUTS : Shows status of External port. VL) SENSING. OPTO INPUT SET. refer to (see 10. EVENT RECORDER. Metering It shows metering values. CONTROL TYPE : Shows specs of Hardware. PROTECTION Set items related to protection elements.2.2. CLOCK.2.2.co. Primary Setting RELAY SETUP Consists of PASSCODE. FACTORY DEBUG.NT http://www. LOOP CONTROL(option) and SET GROUP CHANGE(option).

kr 3. Event Recorder It shows about Event recorder items. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 35 . refer to (see 12.9.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. EVENT RECORDER).entecene. WEAR MONITOR : Shows any damage Interrupter. refer to (see 11. For more details.8.2.NT http://www. MAINTENANCE) 3. POWER QUALITY : Shows counters and time related with supply outage and counters related with swell. For more details. sag and unbalance – Option. Maintenance COUNTERS : Shows counters related with SYSTEM. RELAY OUTPUT TEST : Tests External Output port.2.

DIRECTION 11.FAULT TRIP 6.CLEAR SAVED DATA 0 A 0.Wear Monitor 7.SELECT SETBANK >1.FACTORY DEBUG [NEG SEQ CURRENT] 0 A 0.entecene.INTERVALS >1.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.05 10.CLOD LOAD PICKUP 4.METERING 6.CURRENT (A) 22.EDITBANK SETTING 4.ALL Saved data 3.EXT TRIP&LOCK 9.PROTOCOL SETUP [SETTING] 2.CURRENT SENSING 0 A 0.GROUND DIRECTION 0 A 0.POWER QUALITY 7.PROTECTION 5.FAULT LOCATOR 7.OTHER ELEMENT EVRC2A .OUTPUT RELAY SET 9.SYSTEM SETUP 4.0 Lag 6.RELAY SETUP 3.EVENT RECORDER [POS SEQ CURRENT] 2.S-VOLTAGE 10.L-VOLTAGE 17.LIVE LOAD BLOCK [MAIN MENU] [EVENT RECORDER] >1.0 Lag 4.TIME SET&DIS TYPE [CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.OPTO INPUT SET 8.NT http://www.0 Lag [RELAY SETUP] [COMMUNICATION] >1.POWER QUALITY 4.ENERGY 14.OVER VOLTAGE 2 4.USER CURVE 2 EVERC2A-N6 8.NEG SEQ FAST 2.H/C TRIP-GND 5.0 Lag 2.OVER VOLTAGE 1 3.OPERATION [DIRECTION ELEMENT] 2.VOLTAGE 20.PASSCODE >1.RECLOSER WEAR BREAKER : OPEN 5.STATUS 5.POWER QUALITY >1.H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ 3.Energy 5.SYSTEM STATUS 3.OUTPUT RELAY TEST 3.DEMAND 15.SYNCHROCHECK EVR2A-SYSTEM STATUS 3.COMMUNICATION 2.Daignostic 3.H/C LOCKOUT-GND 2.COUNTERS >1.USER CURVE 3 LOOP CONTROL 9.SAVE SETTING 7.System Status >1.GAS SENSOR TYPE 8.DEMAND 2.0 Lag 9.FREQUENCY 21.CONTROL TYPE >1.0 Lag 3.H/C TRIP-NEQ [USER CURVE SET] 6.MAINTENANCE 8.SYSTEM POWER 6.SEF ELEMENT >1.LOOP CONTROL 10.SYNCHRO VOLTAGE 12.Fault Cycle [SYSTEM SETUP] [SENSTV CURRENT] 2.H/C TRIP-PHA 4.Fault Trip [PHASE C CURRENT] 8.PHASE DIRECTION [PHASE A CURRENT] 3.OPTO INPUTS 12.Counter 6.PICKUP CURRENT 2.SET GROUP CHANGE [STATUS] 11.00 GAS:NOGAS 6.UNDER VOLTAGE 1 >1.CLOCK 3.USER CURVE 1 RECLOSER CONTROL 7.DIAGNOSTIC 5.PHASE FAST 3.DIALUP MODEM-2 ALTERNATE 5.HARMONICS 19.GROUND FAST 7.PANEL SLEEP TIME 7.PRIMARY SETTING 2.LOSS OF PHASE C: 0 G: 0 SG: 0 I2: 0 [MAINTENANCE] [MONITORING] >1.Load Profile 2.UNDER VOLTAGE 2 2.P-Quality Event [GROUND CURRENT] 10.PORT SETUP >1.PHASE DELAY 4.NEQ DIRECTION 0 A 0.WEAR MONITOR 2.GAS LOW LOCK 8.Max Demand 4.EVENT RECORDER Figure 3-12.NEG SEQ DELAY 3.CLOCK [PROTECTION] 4.GROUND DELAY [VOLTAGE] [METERING] 8.USER CURVE SET A: 0 B: 0 23.SYSTEM 16.kr [LINE CURRENT(A)] A: 0 B: 0 C: 0 G: 0 SG: 0 I2: 0 [ZERO SEQ CURRENT] 0 A 0.LOAD PROFILE 4.MONITORRING 6.ALTERNATE SETTING 3.0 Lag 3.USER CURVE 4 ENTEC E&E CO.P-Quality Count 0 A 0.POWER 13.FREQUENCY 11.FAULT CYCLE 2.SEF DIRECTION [PHASE B CURRENT] 5. V6.LINE VS SENSING 4.Comm Event 0 A 0.0 Lag 5.CURRENT 9.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA >1.LINE VL SENSING 5.co.UNBALANCE 18.DIALUP MODEM-1 PRIMARY 4.TRIP COUNTER CONTROL : NOPANEL 4.EVENT&ETC EDITBANK 4. Menu Structure Tree 36 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .BATTERY TEST BAT:24.RELAY OUTPUTS 13.

1. INITING LOGO EVRC2A-SYSTEM STATUS Starting mode Message Display.METERING >7. View Example To see External input port status. MAIN MENU [MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.kr 3. use [▲] [▼] key to see next >Input 8: CLOSE >Door st: CLOSE lines. When cursor is in top menu.entecene.EDITBANK SETTING Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.49 GAS: NOGAS Breaker : Breaker Status displays Battery : Battery Voltage displays Gas : Gas Status displays On Starting mode screen. if you press [▲] key.SELECT SETBANK >2.STATUS >6.3.PRIMARY SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key. >1. you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation Menu Algorithm.3. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 37 . to see Main Menu. press [FUN] key.MAINTENANCE >8.EVENT RECORDER As above explanation. you can move and select sub-menu. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS”. >Input 2: CLOSE >Input 3: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted. STATUS / OPTO INPUTS [OPTO INPUTS] >Input 1: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. >5. >Input 4: OPEN >Input 5: OPEN >Input 6: OPEN >Input 7: OPEN Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen. Use [▲] [▼] key to select sub- menu. >3. Using the LCD Menu Starting mode Screen appears after powering on Control and initializing System. 3.co. The following screen is displayed. CONTROL : NORMAL BREAKER : CLOSE Control : Control Status displays BAT:27.ALTERNATE SETTING >4.NT http://www.

NOTE: You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu. Setting Example Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting.2.NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE [PICKUP CURRENT A] Range OFF. A following screen is displayed. Help Function Help function displays the detail requirements for the setting. User can check the detail requirements of a setting after selecting the setting item by pressing [FUN] key. Press [ENT] key and then you can see the changed Phase value.kr 3.F: OFF Set the pickup current of Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Help Message Pick up current .10~1600A) S.3. 3.E. use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column.3. 1) Move to “PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”.phase (OFF.F: OFF 38 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .E.ph Help Message : >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 Pickup current . to move to Phase. 2) As above screen.3.co.entecene. 10 ~ 1600 >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1A S. 3) Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.

screen ②(Left) appears. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS” and follow each step as below. SETTING VALUE SAVE <ENT>:SETTING SAVE 3) If screen ② appears. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 39 .kr 3. otherwise screen ① ② (Left) appears again. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS ① 1) Type Passcode and press [ENT] key ENTER PASSCODE 0000 2) If Passcode is correct.entecene.co.NT http://www. However.30.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY. Move to “PRIMARY. press [ENT] key to save changed value.3. SAVE SETTING If the “save” procedure is canceled. the changed setting is applied after rebooting. if a setting related with communication is changed and then saved. by EVRC2A version 5. Setting Save To save all changed values. the setting keeps previous value. ③ NOTE : The changed setting can be effective after it is saved. steps are as follows.4.

EVRC2A has 6 setting banks and the user can have 6 different sets depending on Distribution circumstance.40 and 4 more banks added since version 4. SELECT SETBANK / ALTERNATE [SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6 >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK2 Step ~ >Edit: BANK3 Set Alternate for BANK2.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.40. SELECT SETBANK There were only Primary and Alternative banks before version 4.kr 4.co. SELECT SETBANK / PRIMARY [SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6 >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK1 Step ~ >Edit: BANK3 Set Primary for BANK1. 40 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . SELECT SETBANK / EDIT [SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6 >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK3 Step ~ >Edit: BANK3 Set Edit for BANK3.entecene.

[ENT] key. [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000 ② Enter new PASSCODE. ③ ③ To change and store PASSCODE. and press [ENT] key. ENTER PASSCODE 0000 y Passcode change procedure is as follows.co. 5.kr 5. from version 4. enter. Passcode PRIMARY. [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE ④ After changing PASSCODE. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / PASSCODE ① y Press PASSCODE to store changed value. [PASSCODE CHANGE] y PASSCODE has 4 digits. new PASSCODE will be displayed.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www. there may be no “Gas Sensor Type”. RELAY SETUP Relay set shall be set independently for each bank. and press [ENT] key. regardless of bank. ④ [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000 PASSCODE SAVED: 0000 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 41 . ② ① Enter the old PASSCODE.1. However.41.entecene. Sets following items for Relay y Passcode y Communication y Clock y Event Recorder y Clear Saved Data y Factory Debug y Gas Sensor Type y Time SET&DIS Type NOTE : According to a recloser type. it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.

the Port3 type of EVRC2A can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 42 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Side Panel RS-485 PORT3 1200 . The EVRC2A has the front panel RS232 port.19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Side Panel or RS-232 PORT4 RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-T User Interface Side Panel PORT1(RS232) A port to interface with Interface Software. PORT3(RS485 or RS232) – Option The Port3 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS. DNP3.entecene. the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected. Table 5-1. the side panel RS485 port(or RS232 port) and the side panel Ethernet port. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A Port Type Speed Parity bit Data bit Stop bit Location PORT1 RS-232 57600 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Front Panel PORT2 RS-232 1200 . Communication 5.2. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port2 for the selected protocol by changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port2.0 or IEC60870-5-101 protocol.kr 5.co. Communication port settings are available as follows in “Table 5-1.2.0 or IEC60870-5-101 protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port3 for the selected protocol by changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port3. However. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A”. the side panel RS232 port. Overview EVRC2A has four ports for communication. The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. PORT2(RS232) – Option The Port2 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS. DNP3.NT http://www.1. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A.

30. if a setting related with communication is changed and then saved. NOTE: From EVRC2A version 5.0 Protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port4 for the selected protocol by changing its settings. Please refer to “DNP3. a user can connect with the Interface Software “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” and use it.0 Protocol Technical Manual”. “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual” or “IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual” for more information about setting for each protocol.entecene. During IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.kr PORT4(RJ-45) – Option The Port4 is a Ethernet port for TCP/IP communication (10 BASE-T /100 BASE-T speed) for Modbus.0 communication through Port2. IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.co. Port3 or Port 4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 43 . the changed setting is applied after rebooting.NT http://www.

0-1] Range DISABLE.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65519 >Master Addr’: 60000 >Slave Addr’: 1 Default 60000 Step 1 >D/L Confirm: SOME Enter the master station address.0 Protocol Technical Manual” Move to “PRIMARY.0 Protocol or not.2.0 Protocol. Protocol Setup 5. P4-TCP >Function: ENABLE >Use Port: P2-232 DNP1 : P2-232 >Master Addr’: 60000 Default Step ~ DNP2 : P3-232 Select DNP3 communication port.0 through communication port2.kr 5. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master Address [DNP3.co. P3-485. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2” to select setting for DNP 3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Function [DNP3.NT http://www. refer to “DNP3. DNP 3.Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the DNP 3.entecene.2. ENABLE >Function: ENABLE Use Port: P2-232 Default DISABLE Step ~ Master Addr’: 60000 Select whether to use DNP3. 44 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Use Port [DNP3. For details.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65519 >Master Addr’: 60000 >Slave Addr’: 1 DNP1 : 1 >D/L Confirm: SOME Default Step 1 DNP2 : 2 Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address.0 Protocol . COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Slave Address [DNP3.0-1] Range P2-232. port3 or port4.2.2. P3-232.

NT http://www. EVRC2A will send Data Link Frame again.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. YES. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 45 .entecene.0-1] Range 0 ~ 255 >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 Default 2 Step 1 >D/L Timeout: 55 Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link layer. it shall be set as Host setting. YES : Data Link Confirm is used.co. SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame. the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Retries [DNP3.0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 Default 55 Step 1 sec >D/L Timeout: 55 Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.0-1] Range NO.0-1] Range 0~ 255 >D/L Retries: 2 >D/L Timeout: 55 Default 1 Step 1 >A/L Retries: 1 Select the number of retries that will be issued for a given application link layer. SOME >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 Default SOME Step ~ >D/L Timeout: 55 Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not. If the setting is different from Host setting. When Data Link Confirm use-setting.kr COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Confirm [DNP3. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Timeout [DNP3. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Retries [DNP3.

0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec A/L Retries: 1 A/L Timeout: 55 Default 15 sec Step 1 sec >SBO Time: 15 Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function.0-1] Range DISABLE.kr COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Timeout [DNP3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec D/L Timeout: 55 A/L Retries: 1 Default 55 Step 1 sec >A/L Timeout: 55 Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK) from Master Application.05 Step 0.01 sec >Multi Inter: 0. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Tx Delay [DNP3.10 >Tx Delay : 0. Disable : Unsolicited response is not transmitted. NOTE : The setting does not apply to communication and is not indicated from Ver 7.NT http://www. 0.0-1] Range 0.00 sec >A/L Timeout: 55 >SBO Time: 15 Default 0.10 Default 0.01 ~ 300.0] Range 0.entecene. Enable : Unsolicited response is transmitted.01 sec >Tx Delay : 0.01 ~ 300.10 Enter a time delay between frames when Multi-frame replies. 46 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . ENABLE >Multi Inter: 0.co.05 Default ENABLE Step ~ >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE Select the unsolicited mode. in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.00 sec >DNP Address: 1 >Multi Inter: 0. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / SBO Time [DNP3. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Multi Inter [DNP3. Select command is cancelled.07 of EVRC2A_NT. If no operation command during set time. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / PowUp Unsol [DNP3.05 Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.10 Step 0.00(OFF).

0-1] Range 0 ~ 255 sec >Multi Inter: 0. ENABLE >Class 1: DISABLE Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >Class 3: DISABLE Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 1 events. ENABLE Class 1: DISABLE Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >Class 3: DISABLE Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 3 events.0-1] Range NOTRIG.0-1] Range DISABLE. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 3 [DNP3.NT http://www.0-1] Range DISABLE. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 47 . COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 1 [DNP3.co. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 2 [DNP3. PERIOD >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 Default NOTRIG Step ~ >Unsol Type: NOTRIG Set a type to configure a method to send event data.entecene.0-1] Range DISABLE.10 >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec >Unsol Time: 5 Set a delay time of transmission of event data after the last event occurs. PERIOD : Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting “Unsol Time” starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENABLE >Class 1: DISABLE >Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >Class 3: DISABLE Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 2 events.kr COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Time [DNP3. the event data is transmitted. NOTRIG : If there is no more event occurrence during setting “Unsol Time” after the last event occurs. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Type [DNP3.

4 is ①. IP Address : 192.③.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65535 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 Default 20000 Step 1 >UDP Port: 20000 Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication. 1 ~ 600 sec [DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port: 20000 >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 Default 10 Step 1sec >Fragment Size: 2048 Set the Time period that checks the communication connecting status during the idle status.kr COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master IP Oct 1~4 [DNP3. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / UDP Port [DNP3. UDP >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 Default TCP Step ~ >UDP Port: 20000 Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).0-1] Range 0 ~ 65535 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 Default 20000 Step 1 >UDP Port: 20000 Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.④ COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP/UDP Select [DNP3.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.xxx. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Fragment Size Range 64 ~ 2048 [DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port: 20000 >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 Default 2048 Step 1 >Fragment Size: 2048 Set the size of DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 255 >Master IP Oct1: 192 >Master IP Oct2: 168 Default ~ Step 1 >Master IP Oct3: >Master IP Oct4: 7 2 Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.3. 48 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .0 fragment.co.NT http://www.xxx. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Keep Alive Check Time Range 0(OFF).②.0-1] Range TCP.2. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP Port [DNP3.xxx ① ② ③ ④ IP Addr´1.

entecene. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 65535 >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P2-232 Default 1 Step 1 >Link Addr: 1 Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm- unication. NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.NT http://www. P3-232.co.2.Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through communication port2 or port3. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 49 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870- 5-101 Protocol. P3-485 >Function: DISABLE >Use Port P2-232 Default P2-232 Step ~ >Link Addr: 1 Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication. 5. Move to “PRIMARY. 1 ~ 30000 min [DNP3 SLAVE1] >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 >Fragment Size: 2048 Default 1440 Step 1 min >Time Req(m): 1440 Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time received from master station.kr COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Time Req(m) Range 0(OFF).04 of EVRC2A_NT. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function Range DISABLE.2. ENABLE [IEC60870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >Use Port: P2-232 >Link Addr: 1 Select whether to use IEC60870-5-101 protocol.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol . COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Use Port [IEC60870-5-101] Range P2-232.

If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is available.NT http://www.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~65535 >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 Default 1 Step 1 >Event Period: 15 Select the Application Service Data Unit Address. the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master. Timeout [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec >Retries: 0 >Conf. EVRC2A transfers the Data again. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Retries [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 255 >Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 Default 0 Step 1 >Max Poll Time: 10 Set the Data retires number.Timeout: 10 Default 60 Step 1 sec >Max Poll Time: 10 Set the Data Polling period time. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec >Retries: 0 >Conf. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~60000 sec >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 Default 60 Step 1 sec >Event Period: 15 Select the Cyclic Period.co.Timeout: 10 Default 15 Step 1 sec >Max Poll Time: 10 Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transferring the Data.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~255 sec >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 Default 15 Step 1sec >Event Period: 15 Select the delay time before events are sent. 50 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

1 ~ 255 sec >Rx Frame Size: 261 >Rx Frame TO : 15 Default 15 Step 1 sec >Tx Frame Size: 261 Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after receiving the frame sync. ALWAYS >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default ALWAYS Step ~ >Link Addr Size: 1 Enter the Link layer confirm mode.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2 >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default 2 Step 1 >ADSU Addr Size: 2 Enter the size of cause of transmission. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NEVER. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261 >Tx Frame Size: 261 >COT Size : 1 Default 261 Step 1 >IOA Size : 2 Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261 >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 261 Step 1 >Rx Frame TO : 15 Enter the maximum size of received frame. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 51 .entecene. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2 >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 1 Step 1 >Link Addr Size: 1 Enter the size of link address.NT http://www. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF).

entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. YES >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands. YES >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default NO Step ~ >Select Timeout: 5 This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length NACK when no response data available. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~3 >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 Default 2 Step 1 >One Ch Response: NO Enter the size of information object address. 1~255 >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1 >CSE Termination:YES Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF). 52 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2 >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 Default 1 Step 1 >One Ch Response: NO Enter the size of cause of transmission.NT http://www. 1~255sec >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec >Select Timeout: 5 Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer timeout). COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF).

3. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO.NT http://www. YES >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7. Move to “PRIMARY.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 53 . 5.Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through communication port4. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~65535 >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Addr: 1 Default 1 Step 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.2.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function Range DISABLE. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol . ENABLE [IEC60870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 Select whether to use IEC60870-5-104 protocol or not.2.co.06 of EVRC2A_NT. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870- 5-104 Protocol. YES >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.

Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t1) [IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 Default 15 Step 1sec >Time Out(t2): 10 Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t2) [IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 Default 10 Step 1sec >Time Out(t2): 10 Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message ( t2<t1). COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0) [IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 Default 120 Step 1sec >Time Out(t2): 10 Select the Timeout for connection establishment.entecene.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~60000 sec >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Addr: 1 Default 60 Step 1 sec >Cyclic Period: 60 Select the Cyclic Period. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t3) [IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 Default 20 Step 1sec >Time Out(t3): 20 Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period [IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~255 sec >Time Out(t2): 10 >Time Out(t3): 20 Default 5 Step 1 >Event Period: 5 Select the delay time before events are sent. 54 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .NT http://www. the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255 >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1 >Select Timeout: 5 Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.co. YES >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >CSE Termination:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands. YES >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands. 1~255 >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1 >CSE Termination:YES Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port Range 0 ~ 65535 [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t3): 20 Default 2404 Step 1 >Event Period: 5 >TCP Port: 2404 Set the TCP/IP Port of EVRC2A for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol communication.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout* [IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF). COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 55 .NT http://www. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255 >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1 >Select Timeout: 5 Enter the maximum size of received frame.entecene.

port3 or port4. P3-485. P3-232.2. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function Range DISABLE.06 of EVRC2A_NT.entecene.Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication port2. For details. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Use Port [MODBUS] Range P2-232. 56 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . 5. YES >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~ >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol. refer to “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual” Move to “PRIMARY.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt* [IEC60870-5-101] Range NO. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address [MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 254 >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P3-485 Default 1 Step 1 >Slave Address: 1 Enter the Modbus address. ENABLE [MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ Use Port: P3-485 >Slave Addr: 1 Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.2. MODBUS Protocol .NT http://www.4. P4-TCP >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P3-485 Default P4-TCP Step ~ >Slave Address: 1 Select MODBUS communication port.co.

entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 57 .NT http://www.005 Step 0.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ UDP Port [MODBUS] Range 0 ~ 65535 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 Default 502 Step 1 >UDP Port: 502 Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication. UDP >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 Default TCP Step ~ >UDP Port: 502 Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).500 sec >Slave Address: 1 >Tx Delay: 0.000 ~ 0.kr COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Tx Delay [MODBUS] Range 0. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP Port [MODBUS] Range 0 ~ 65535 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 Default 502 Step 1 >UDP Port: 502 Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select [MODBUS] Range TCP.005 Default 0.001 sec >TCP/UDP Select: TCP Delay time of sending Real data from RTS Signal is on.

EVEN >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 Default NONE Step ~ >Stop Bit: 1 Select whether to use Parity Bit.2.NT http://www. 4800.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. 19200 bps >Line Speed: 19200 >Parity Bit: NONE Default 19200 Step ~ >Data Bit: 8 Select the baud rate for PORT2.kr 5. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232” to select setting for PORT2. 9600. Move to “PRIMARY. ODD. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Data Bit* [PORT1-RS232] Range 7.entecene.2. 8 >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 Default 8 Step ~ >Stop Bit: 1 Select the Data Bit. PORT2-RS232 EVRC2A side panel PORT2 and related elements are set.3. Port Setup 5.04 of EVRC2A_NT. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Line Speed [PORT1-RS232] Range 1200.1. 58 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .3. 2 >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 Default 1 Step ~ >Stop Bit: 1 Select the Stop Bit. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Stop Bit* [PORT1-RS232] Range 1. 2400. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Parity Bit* [PORT1-RS232] Range NONE. NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.

4-WIRE : 4-wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 59 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. AUTO >CTS Function: ON >DCD Function: OFF Default AUTO Step ~ >RTS Function: AUTO Set whether to use RTS signal and the mode or not. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Function [PORT1-RS232] Range OFF.co.entecene. transfer a data. OFF : Regardless of DCD signal.NT http://www.kr COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ Line Type [PORT1-RS232] Range DIALUP. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Function [PORT1-RS232] Range OFF. transfer a data. 2-WIRE : 2-wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect). AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem. RTS signal of EVRC2A is off. ON >CTS Function: ON >DCD Function: OFF Default OFF Step ~ >RTS Function: AUTO Set whether to use DCD signal or not. after RTS signal of EVRC2A is on and after data transfer completion. transfer a data. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ RTS Function [PORT1-RS232] Range OFF. ON. ON : After confirming DCD signal is Asserted. ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always ON(Assert). transfer a data. OFF : Regardless of CTS signal. 2-WIRE. OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always OFF(Deassert). 4-WIRE >Stop Bit: 1 >Line Type: 4-WIRE Default 4-WIRE Step ~ >CTS Function: ON Select a modem for communication. ON : After confirming CTS signal is Asserted. DIALUP : Dial-Up modem1 is used. ON >Line Speed: 19200 >Line Type: 4-WIRE Default ON Step ~ >CTS Function: ON Select whether to use CTS signal or not.

COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Post Delay [PROT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec >CTS CheckOut: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 50 Step 1 msec >TX Post Dly: 50 Set the delay time of RTS OFF after data transmission. It is available if ‘CTS Function’ setting is ON. In case of radio communication system. By this setting. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Timeout [PORT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec >CTS Chk Out: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 5000 Step 1 msec >TX Post Dly: 50 Set a delay time for checking DCD signal which determines modem status before sending RTS signal in 2-wire communication type.NT http://www. it produces transmission permission delay time due to the wireless network traffic congestion. It is available if ‘DCD Function’ setting is ON.kr COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Chk Out [PORT1-RS232] Range 1 ~ 255 sec >CTS Chk Out: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 5 Step 1 sec >TX Post Dly: 50 Set a waiting time that waits CTS signal after RTS signal is ON. EVRC2A does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail after the set time. 60 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . If DCD signal is ON.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Pre Delay [PORT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec >DCD Timeout: 5000 >TX Post Dly: 50 Default 5 Step 1 msec >TX Pre Dly: 50 Set the delay time of starting transmission after CTS signal is received. when transfer data at the same time from various Slave.co.entecene. try the transmission with high RTS during checkout time.

②.xxx.co.3.xxx ① ② ③ ④ Gateway Addr´1. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ POR4-TCP/IP” to select setting for PORT4.③. Gateway Address : 192.②.2.2.2.0 ~ 255.255.xxx ① ② ③ ④ IP Addr´1.0.255.2.kr 5.3. PORT4-TCP/IP EVRC2A side panel PORT4 and related elements are set. 5.xxx. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ POR3-232/485” to select setting for PORT3.255.3.255.255 >Gateway Oct3: 0 >Gateway Oct4: 0 Default 255. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / IP Addr’1 ~ 4 [PORT4-TCP/IP] Range 0 ~ 255 >IP Addr’1: IP Addr’2: 0 0 Default ~ Step 1 IP Addr’3: >IP Addr’4: 0 0 Select the IP Address for EVRC2A.000 Step 1 >S/M:255.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene.③.1.0. IP Address : 192.④ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / Gateway Addr’1 ~ 4 [PORT4-TCP/IP] Range 0 ~ 255 >Gateway Addr’1: Gateway Addr’2: 0 0 Default ~ Step 1 Gateway Addr’3: >Gateway Addr’4: 0 0 Select the Gateway Address.255.NT http://www.3.000 Select the Subnet Mask Address for EVRC2A. PORT2-RS232”.3.3.2. Move to “PRIMARY.255. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 61 .④ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / SubnetMask [PORT4-TCP/IP] Range 255.xxx. Refer to “5.2. PORT3-RS232/485 EVRC2A side panel PORT3 and related elements are set.4 is ①. Move to “PRIMARY.xxx. The setting item of this menu is same as “PORT2-RS232”.4 is ①.

Alv’ Function Range DISABLE. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Interval Range 1 ~ 255 sec [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default 2 Step 1sec >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2 After checking the communication connecting status.NT http://www.kr COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP /K. If there isn’t a respond. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Idle T Range 1 ~ 255 sec [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default 4 Step 1sec >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2 If Idle status is maintained during the setting time. take as communication fail and close the communication connection. check the communication connecting maintainance status. 62 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene.co. check the status again if there isn’t any reply during the setting time. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Retry Range 1 ~ 255 [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 Default 1 Step 1 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2 >K-Alv’ Retry: 1 Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENABLE [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2 Select whether to use the Ethernet communication connecting status check function or not.

and set DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems. The configuration of the Port2 for use of dial-up modem can be set on the menu “DIALUP MODEM-1”.entecene. Dialup Modem Setup” for more information about the configuration of Port2 and Port3 for the dial-up modem communication. Configure Data Set Ready(must be done) Data Set Ready should verify the modem.NT http://www. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 63 . it can be set on the menu “DIALUP MODEM- 2”. Configure port speed(must be done) Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A and Modem. Configure modem with AT commands Before using Modem connected with EVRC2A.4. For the configuration of the Port3. Hayes-compatible.4. If DTR is low. If DTR is high. The AT command is AT&S0. RTU Communication Setup (DIALUP MODEM) . the modem is ready to receive calls.kr 5. Refer to “5.4. 5. Configure answer mode(frequently) The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2. through Port2 and Port3 when their port types are both RS232. following setting shall be confirmed. DSR is always ON.Option EVRC2A can support dial-up modem communication. The AT command is AT&C1. Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done) Data Terminal Ready should control the modem.4. the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing call.1.2.2.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The AT command is AT&D2. Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done) Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.co.2.

NT http://www. receiving is not working. y Wait 0.kr Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done) A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received.2. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and negotiating a common protocol and speed. 5. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.4. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem Transmitting a Communication Packet y Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online) y The Communication packet is transmitted ※.2.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Dial when DCD is Deassert Receiving a Communication Packet y Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online) y The Communication packet is received ※. y Checks DCD is Asserted ※. Dialing y The user should insert an order for Reset. Configure no echo of commands(must be done) Echoing commands can confuse the console.co. as it prevents a human being accidentally repeatedly called. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user. This is very useful for a dialing modem. so turn off command echoing. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems. The AT command is ATQ1. 64 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . For example: CONNECT 9600 The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.entecene. The AT command is ATE0. Configure silent connection(must be done) Most modems have a speaker.5 second y Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number. The AT command is ATM1. if DCD is Deassert.

4. Device Name: This is the device name sending a short message.NT http://www.kr Hang up y DTR Line is deasserted y Wait 2 second y DTR Line is asserted y Wait 2 second ※. Maximum 5 phone numbers are able to be assigned for receiving SMS and maximum 6 events on a signal message per one phone number can be sent at a time.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 65 .Option SMS function is provided for communication based on the dialing modem to send messages of significant events occurrences to the phones or other communication devices whose phone numbers are assigned to EVRC2A for SMS function by the Interface Software. see the DNP point table. The total maximum events for each a phone number are 48 events.2. Point index Description: This point index description to indicate which event occurs is described with maximum 5 characters and it is the same with the point index used for DNP. In order to figure out what this description means.3. ※ The current SMS function supports to send a message only for Binary Input event. 5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. Short Message Service (SMS) Support . Point Index Value: This indicates the current status value of the point where an event occurs. EVRC2A will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or transmitted. Following information are included in a single message for SMS.

ATDT 2) Push the [ENT] button after “Calling String” is changed. ATDT ATD : Default Dial ATDT : Tone Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type) ② ATDP : Pulse Dial [NEW CALLING STRING] ATDT At ①.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING STRING ① Select a proper dial string in accordance with communication [CALLING STRING] circumstance (Master or Switchboard dial method). PRESS ENTER TO SAVE ③ 1) In order to change each alphabet(A~Z. [NEW CALLING STRING] use [◀]. ④ is shown.NT http://www.4. ④ [NEW CALLING STRING] If [ENT] button is pushed at ②. Dialup Modem Setup Calling String In order to set “Calling String”. use [▲]. Insert “Calling String” which a user wants. but changed setting is not applied yet. then ② is !!! SAVE OK !!! shown. ATDT Change of setting is completed and then ③ is shown.2. 66 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . go to “PRIMARY.SAVE SETTING” menu. NOTE: The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*. [▶] button to move cursor. [▼] button.kr 5.co. then “Calling String” is changed. !!! SAVE ABORT !!! If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②. space). ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CALLING STRING”.4.

entecene. Changing !!! SAVE OK !!! setting is completed and then ③ is shown. [NEW CALLING NUMBER] 0000000000000000 1) Use [▲].NT http://www. X) and use [◀]. ③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.kr Calling Number In order to set “Calling Number”. go to “PRIMARY. but changed setting is 0000000000000XXX not applied yet.SAVE SETTING” menu. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING NUMBER ① Insert [Modem(Master station) phone number] for calling. ② Insert “Calling Number” which a user wants at ①. ④ [NEW CALLING NUMBER] If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②. If numbers under 16 are inputted. !!! SAVE ABORT !!! NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CALLING NUMBER” menu. [▼] button to change each number(0~9. [NEW CALLING NUMBER] 0000000000000XXX “Calling Number” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. ④ is shown. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 67 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRESS ENTER TO SAVE [▶] button to move a cursor. [CALLING NUMBER] Total 16 numbers can be inputted. the 0000000000000000 rest should be inputted with “X”.co.

ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2/ INITIAL STRING” menu. but changed setting is not applied yet. ④ [NEW INITIAL STRING] “Initial String” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. < > ※ Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String. ② [NEW INITIAL STRING] Insert “Initial String” which a user wants on ①.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / INITIAL STRING ① Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number. ③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown. AT+FCLASS=0 1) Use [▲].NT http://www. [INITIAL STRING] character. ATQ1E0M1&C1&D2S0=1 <AT+FCLASS=0 > EVRC2A should be reset before making a phone call(connection). ④ is shown. [▼] button to change each number. !!! SAVE ABORT !!! If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②.SAVE SETTING” menu. [▶] button to move a cursor. alphabet.entecene.co. [NEW INITIAL STRING] AT+FCLASS=0 NOTE : continuous double spaces or the character next to “\” is !!! SAVE OK !!! ignored.kr Initial String In order to set “Initial String”. space or PRESS ENTER TO SAVE special character and use [◀]. “PRIMARY. Changing setting AT+FCLASS=0 is completed and then ③ is shown. 68 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . space or special character. NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*.

COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Cmd Res’ TO Range 0 ~ 255 sec [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 2 Step 1 sec >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60 Setting the Command response waiting time. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CONNECT PARAM’”. it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained. COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Connect TO Range 0 ~ 255 sec [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 30 Step 1 sec >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection waiting time. COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Idle Time Range 0 ~ 255 sec [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 60sec Step 1 sec >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection close time.entecene. the status of modem failure is maintained. it is considered as a connection failure after the setting time. the connection is closed after the setting time.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Time (Option) Range 0~255sec [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Idle Time: 60 Default 5sec Step 1sec >SMS Use: DIABLE >SMS Time: 5 SMS Time is a waiting time to wait for response after a short message of SMS is sent.co. If there is no response from a modem during setting time. COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Use (Option) Range DIABLE. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 69 . During setting time. If there is no connection during setting time.ENABLE [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Idle Time: 60 Default DIABLE Step ~ >SMS Use?: DIABLE >SMS Time: 5 Enable or disable Short Message Service (SMS) function.kr Connect Parameter Move to “PRIMARY.

MULTI [CONNECT PARAMETER] >SMS Use: DIABLE Default MULTI Step ~ >SMS Time: 5 >SMS Type: MULTI Single or Multiple type is supported for SMS message. 70 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene.kr COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Type (Option) Range SINGLE. 25 characters) including description and the occurring time of event in one SMS message.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. SMS Time and SMS Type.co. are shown on the menu of EVRC2A supporting SMS function. Single type is to send one event’s information(max. Multiple type is to send maximum 4 events’ information(max.NT http://www. SMS Use. NOTE: The setting items. 11 characters respectively) including only description of each event in one SMS message.

EVENT&ETC Move to “PRIMARY. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Queue Size Range 32. Use EVRC2A interface program to set “Event Active” enable or disable of AI point and the Threshold value and Deadband value.128.YES [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF Default YES Step ~ > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES NO : No Fault current event generated. DB : Event occurs when the AI data change value is over the Deadband value. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / SKIP at Fault Range NO. OFF : AI Point Event doesn’t occur.2. TH : Event occurs when the AI Point data is over or less than Threshold value.64.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Fault ‘I’ Evt Range NO. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Method Range OFF.kr 5.256 [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 Default 256 Step ~ > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256 Set the Binary Queue Size. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 71 .DB.TH. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC”. BOTH : TH and DB are both used.5.NT http://www.co. YES : Fault current event is generated at every fault sequence.BOTH [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF Default OFF Step ~ > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES Select the Analog Event Type.YES [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF Default YES Step ~ > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated during Fault pickup. This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event Active” in DNP point map.

128.128. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Queue Size Range 32.kr COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Mode Range ALL. LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point. ALL : All Counter is buffed for the same point. LAST [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~ > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL Set the Counter Event Mode. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Mode Range ALL.64.co. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Queue Size Range 32.64. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Mode Range ALL. 72 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point.256 [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 Default 256 Step ~ > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256 Set the Analog Queue Size. LAST [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 Default ALL Step ~ > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256 Set the Binary Event Mode.256 [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: OFF Default 256 Step ~ > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL Set the Counter Queue Size. ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.NT http://www. LAST [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~ > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL Set the Analog Event Mode.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point. ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.

COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘P’ Unit Range 1K.04 of EVRC2A_N6. NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.kr COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘V’ Unit Range 1V.entecene. 10K: 10K per 1count of transmitted data. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 73 . 1V: 1V per 1count of transmitted data. NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6. 10V: 10V per 1count of transmitted data. The data format of AI points associated with a voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10K per 1count . the corresponding AI point transmits 13200. If a voltage magnitude is 13. the corresponding AI point transmits 66. If active power is 660kW. 1K: 1K per 1count of transmitted data. the corresponding AI point transmits 660.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. If active power is 660kW.co.2kV. 10V [EVENT&ETC] > CI Evt Mode: ALL Default 10V Step ~ > AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a voltage.NT.NT http://www.NT.2kV. the corresponding AI point transmits 1320. The data format of AI points associated with a voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10V per 1count . 10K [EVENT&ETC] > CI Evt Mode: ALL Default 10K Step ~ > AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a power.04 of EVRC2A_N6. If a voltage magnitude is 13.

YES : Daily Energy is recorded as event. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Energy Range NO. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 7.YES [EVENT&ETC] > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Default NO Step ~ > Daily Max I: NO > Daily Energy: NO Select whether to transfer the AI event about daily max. NO : Daily Max. load current. YES : Daily Max. 74 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .12 of EVRC2A_N6.04 of EVRC2A_NT. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www. the time internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.entecene.NT. NO : Daily Energy is not recorded as event. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Time Syn’ Ref Range LOCAL.co.GMT [EVENT&ETC] >Daily Energy: NO Default LOCAL Step ~ >Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Evt Time Type:LOCAL Set Reference Time Type. Load Current is recorded as event. Load Current is not recorded as event.12 of EVRC2A_N6.kr COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Max I Range NO. NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu) are set up incorrectly.NT. It signifies the time data type when Time Synching with the master station.YES [EVENT&ETC] > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Default NO Step ~ > Daily Max I: NO > Daily Energy: NO Select whether to transfer the AI event about energy at midnight.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The name of this setting is indicated as "Evt Sent Type".co.GMT [EVENT&ETC] >Daily Energy: NO Default LOCAL Step ~ >Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Evt Time Type:LOCAL Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication.04 and later : Within “RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICTION / EVENT&ETC” menu.entecene. NOTE : The location of “Evt Time Type” setting depends on EVRC2A_NT version.kr COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Evt Time Type Range LOCAL.04 : Within “RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE”. y Ver 7. y Prior to Ver 7. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 75 .NT http://www.

⑤ is shown and the changed time ④ settings are not saved.co. press [ENT] button to save. The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ④ is shown.01:50 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE If [ESC] button is pressed at ③. Clock In order to configure current date and time.NT http://www.kr 5. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLOCK” menu. go to “PRIMARY.entecene.3.15 of EVRC2A RELAY SETUP / CLOCK ① Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②. Prior to Ver 6. [SETTING TIME] 2) After all settings for time are changed. 2009/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings ③ [SAVE TIME] If procedure of saving is completed. 2009/11/06 15. [SAVE TIME] * SUCCESS * ⑤ [SAVE TIME] * ABORT * 76 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . a cursor is marked [CURRENT TIME] to be able to change current date and time 2009/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS <ENT> TO SET 1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to ② move to next item.

press [ENT] button to save. PRESS <ENT> TO SET [CURRENT TIME] Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②. [SETTING TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE move to next item.NT http://www.co. ⑤ [SAVE TIME] * ABORT * ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 77 .kr From Ver 6. a cursor is marked L ⓐ G ⓑ to be able to change current date and time. [SAVE TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE ④ If procedure of saving is completed. PRESS <ENT> TO SET It sets the present time to GMT Time or Local time according to the ② “TIME SET&DIS’ TYPE” menu’s “Set Type” setting. ③ 2) After all settings for time are changed.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. [SAVE TIME] If [ESC] button is pressed at ③. ④ is shown.15 of EVRC2A RELAY SETUP / CLOCK ① Screen ① indicates the present time.entecene. ⑤ is shown and the changed time * SUCCESS * settings are not saved. [CURRENT TIME] ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time. L2009/01/01 09:00:00 G2009/01/01 00:00:00 ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time.

OFF >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~ >Load Profile: ON Select On or Off for Load Profile recording. RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile [EVENT RECORDER] Range ON.10. RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Event Recorder Event Recording elements are set such as Recording and Sampling timing and so on.4. Recorded Fault Cycle can be viewed in menu.30. Recorded Load Profile can be viewed in menu. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER” to select setting for the event recording elements.co.60 min >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 15 Step ~ >L. 15.kr 5. OFF >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~ >Load Profile: ON Select On or Off for Fault Cycle recording.NT http://www.entecene. “EVENT RECORDER”.P save time(m):15 Set Load Profile recording interval. “EVENT RECORDER”. Move to “PRIMARY. 78 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Fault Cycle [EVENT RECORDER] Range ON.P save time(m) [EVENT RECORDER] Range 5. RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Len’ of Pre F [EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14 cycle >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1 cycle >Load Profile: ON Enter the length of prefault in fault cycle.20.

entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.Fault Trip >10. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.6.Wear Monitor >9.Load Profile >4.Energy SUCCESS” is shown.5. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 79 . >7.Max Demand >6. Clear Saved Data In order to reset saved data. the message. go to “PRIMARY.Daignostic If procedure of clearing is completed.Fault Cycle >2.P-Quality Count y Fault Cycle >11.kr 5.co.System Status Select item for clearing and then press [ENT] button. RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA [CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data >1.P-Quality Event >12.NT http://www. >3. “EVENT CLEAR >5. Factory Debug This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.Comm’ Event y System Status >13. 5.Counter >8.All Saved Data y Load Profile FAULT CYCLE DATA y Diagnostic PRESS ENT TO CLEAR y Max Demand y Energy FAULT CYCLE DATA y Counter !! DATA CLEARED !! y Wear Monitor y Fault Trip y P-Quality Counter y P-Quality Event y Communication Buffer y All Saved Data NOTE : It is recommended to have Backup data because Cleared(Deleted) data can not be recovered.

Move to “PRIMARY.co. 80 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . TYPE2 >Type Select: TYPE2 Default NONE Step ~ NONE : Gas Sensor is not used.entecene.NT http://www.7. TYPE2 : Set TYPE2 if Recloser manufactured from JULY. otherwise.- >Set Type: LOCAL >GMT Sign: . ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE” to select setting for the gas sensor type. TYPE1. Default 0 Step 1 >GMT Hour: 0 Set the hour difference between local time and GMT. Time Set & Display Type – Option It is to set Date Display for all related Menu. RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Hour* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range 0~23 >Set Type: LOCAL >GMT Sign: . Default + Step ~ >GMT Hour: 0 Set GMT time and the local time off-set direction. RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Sign* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range +. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE [GAS SENSOR TYPE] Range NONE. Local time is faster than GMT time. select ‘+’.8.kr 5. 2005. select ‘-’.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. TYPE1 : Set TYPE1 if Recloser manufactured before JUNE. they may be no this setting on the menu. 2005. NOTE : According to a recloser type. Gas Sensor Type Move to “PRIMARY. 5. ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE”.

the time of event transmitted is not correct. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 81 . the problems can be happened as follows.15 of EVRCA. NOTE Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time. Min : 0 NOTE If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly. NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7. Hour : 9.kr RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Min* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range 0~59 >GMT Hour: 0 >GMT Min : 0 Default 0 Step 1 >Disp’ Type: YMD Set the minute difference between local time and GMT.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www. If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT. If the "Time Syn’ Ref" is set to be GMT.entecene. MDY >GMT Min : 0 >Disp’ Type: YMD Default YMD Step ~ >Time Syn’ Ref: GMT YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Time Syn’ Ref [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range LOCAL.co. . . Sing : +. NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 6. the time of the internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization. RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Disp’ Type [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range YMD. GMT >GMT Min : 0 >Disp’ Type: YMD Default GMT Step ~ >Time Syn’ Ref: GMT Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized with GPS(or IRIG). set it as follows (+9:00).04 of EVRC2A_NT.

entecene.1. from version 4. Description This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star). Current Sensing 6.kr 6. refer to (see 13. Phase rotation y Panel sleep time y Opto-Input setting y Relay output setting y Loop Control setting – Option y Set Group Change setting – Option y Power Quality – Option 6. However.41. the sensitive earth input may be used. or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. In this case. the phase. ground.12. For additional details on CT connections. When the relay is ordered. regardless of bank.1.1. the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for the neutral over-current.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.NT http://www. a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors. In addition. 82 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . SYSTEM SETUP System set shall be set independently for each bank. To detect low level ground fault currents. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram). it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank. and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp. For this configuration. the ground CT primary rating must be entered. Sets following items for System y CT Ratio y VT or PT Ratio y Power Line Frequency.

co.1. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200 >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1 SEF CT Ratio: 1000 Enter the phase CT primary current value. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 83 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200 PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1 >SEF CT Ratio: 1000 Enter the sensitive earth CT primary current value.kr 6. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200 PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1 SEF CT Ratio: 1000 Enter the ground CT primary current value.entecene.2.

0 Step 0.0 V Connect Type: NONE >VT 2nd(v): 100. Description To measure Source Voltage.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Line VS Sensing 6.NT http://www. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VS SENSING / Connect Type [LINE VS SENSING] Range NONE.9 Step 0. set Connect Type.9 Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V) This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage is applied to the primary. NONE : VT uninstalled. DELTA : Install type delta.0 ~ 250. DELTA. If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.co.2. With Line VTs installed. 6. VD-W. 84 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .1. WYE. external PT by user.0 Default 155.1 >VT Ratio: 155. VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.0 ~ 760.entecene.9 Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.0 Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS 2nd(v) [LINE VS SENSING] Range 30. WYE : Install type wye.2.2. If used.0 Default 100.0 Default VD-W Step ~ VT Ratio: 155. power calculations.2. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS Ratio [LINE VS SENSING] Range 10. enter the VT connection made to the system as Wye or Delta. VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.1 V VT Ratio: 155. and directional control of over-current elements. the EVRC2A can be used to perform voltage measurements. VT Ratio.kr 6. VD-D >Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100. 2nd Nominal Voltage.9 Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.

59㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 155.2 125 (14400:120) (14400:120) 215 215 27㎸ 100 155.2.1 126. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120. Because of 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8. Setting Examples Use of VD(CVD or RVD) Case of VD(CVD or RVD) installed in Recloser.7 (36000:120) (36000:120) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 85 .3.5(V) × 155.6 (25800:120) (25800:120) 300 300 38㎸ 100 219.66㎸Ф-N / 120 = 71.9 If user line voltage between phases (VoltageФ-Ф) is 11㎸. setup as follows.35㎸Ф-N.66㎸Ф-N. VT Ratios of External PTs Voltage Divider Potential Transformer Line-Line Wye connection Wye connection Delta connection Voltage VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio 120 120 15㎸ 100 86.35㎸ = 40. PT Ratio is calculated as below.NT http://www.9 72. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120. Usable in Wye connection.5 125.94㎸Ф-N = 140.2V Line with Delta connection type and has VФ-Ф= 15㎸.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.9 (11㎸Ф-Ф => 6.7(V) × 155. VT2nd(v) is 8. then VT Ratio is 14400/120. 6.59㎸Ф-N.9 38㎸Ф-Ф = 21.7(V) × 155.66㎸Ф-N = 55. therefore 15.9) 27㎸Ф-Ф = 15.94㎸Ф-N.6 71.7V and set VT Ratio of 155. VoltageФ-Ф = VoltageФ-N × SQRT(3) VoltageФ-N = VT 2nd(v) × VT Ratio Hence. Set VT2nd(v) 100 as Default.co.9 Use of External PT by User Line is Wye connection type and has VФ-Ф = 15㎸.4 73. therefore 21. then VT Ratio is 14400/120 and VT2nd(v) is 15㎸Ф-Ф / 120 = 125V Table 6-1. set VT2nd(v) of 40.66㎸Ф-N.kr 6. therefore 8.entecene. 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.

DELTA. Line VL Sensing 6.NT http://www. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Connect Type [LINE VL SENSING] Range NONE. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT Ratio [LINE VL SENSING] Range 10.kr 6.3.0 V Connect Type: NONE >VT 2nd(v): 100.0 ~ 250. WYE : Install type wye.3. 2nd Nominal Voltage. set Connect Type.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.6 Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V) This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage is applied to the primary. VD-W.co. enter the VT connection made to the system as Wye or Delta.0 ~ 760. 6.0 Default 155. VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.0 Step 0. VT Ratio.0 Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.2. NONE : VT uninstalled. With Line VTs installed. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT 2nd(v) [LINE VL SENSING] Range 30. external PT by user.entecene. the EVRC2A can be used to perform synchronism elements.3.1 >VT Ratio: 155. If used. VD-D >Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.1.0 Default 100. If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type. 86 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . WYE.1 V VT Ratio: 86.9 Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting. Description To measure Load Voltage.0 Default VD-W Step ~ VT Ratio: 155. VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.9 Step 0. DELTA : Install type delta.9 Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.

1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the recloser body unit. 3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed 1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the recloser body unit.co.NT http://www.0 VT Ratio: 155. the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed. 1P-R. Setting Examples) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 87 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Install Type [LINE VL SENSING] Range 3P. 1P-S.entecene.3.04 of EVRC2A_NT. 1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the recloser body unit.2.3. y Directional Control y Loss of Phase y Synchronism Check y Voltage Unbalance Detection y Live Load Blocking y Loop Control NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.3.9 Default 3P Step ~ >Install Type: 3P Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase. Setting Example Refer to (6. 6. 1P-T VT 2nd(v): 100.

kr 6. REV(REVERSE) Frequency: 50 >Phase Rotation: ABC Default NOR Step ~ >Install Dir’: NOR Select the install direction of Recolser. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate. ACB Frequency: 50 >Phase Rotation: ABC Default ABC Step ~ >Install Dir’: NOR Select the phase rotation of the power system.4.2. y Directional Control y Loss of Phase y Synchronism Check y Voltage Unbalance Detection y Live Load Blocking y Loop Control 88 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .4. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Rotation [SYSTEM POWER] Range ABC.co.1. Description Menu to set Frequency of Protected Line and installed Phase rotation 6. During operating after setup. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase.4. the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Install Direction [SYSTEM POWER] Range NOR(NORMAL). change only this setting to convert a load side to a source side or reversely. 60 ㎐ >Frequency: 50 Phase Rotation: ABC Default 50 Step ~ >Install Dir’: NOR Select the nominal power system frequency.NT http://www. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Frequency [SYSTEM POWER] Range 50.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. System Power 6.

cab. if setting value is cab. refer the following figure and table.04 of EVRC2A- N6.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.04.co. bca. NOTE: The “Phase Combination” setting will be shown from version 6. it means that bushing A is connected with phase C and bushing B is connected with phase A.kr NOTE: The voltage sensing type to the load side can be checked on the setting of "Install Type" in the "LINE VL SENSING" menu. cba >Phase Rotation: ABC >Install Dir’: NOR Default abc Step ~ >Phase Combi’: abc Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control device. Figure 6-1.entecene.NT http://www. As example. In order to get the details relevant to the connection for EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Combination [SYSTEM POWER] Range abc.NT from version 6. acb. bac.NT. Phase Connection ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 89 .

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. Phase Connection & Display Mapping Table Line feeding Recommend Setting Phase Mapping Result Bushing Terminal Phase Install Direction LCD/INDEX Display : Bushing/Controller Combination Source V(Load V) / Current Terminal Case 1 : abc abc NORAMAL Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC Case 2 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA Case 3 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB Case 4 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB Case 5 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC Case 6 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA Case 7 : abc abc REVERSE Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC Case 8 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA Case 9 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB Case 10 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB Case 11 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC Case 12 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA 90 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .NT http://www.co.kr Table 6-2.

Panel Sleep Time 6. 1 ~ 100 min >Interval(m): 5 Default 5 Step 1 min Enter the sleep mode entering time Setting the interval time of which Panel indicator turns into Sleep mode.Option 6.5. On “sleep mode”. Description Menu to set External input terminal function and Debounce time The opto input is available as an ordering option.1. Opto Input Set .2. press [▼] button to be out from the “sleep mode”.NT http://www.5. Status LCD Display Debounce time Triger EXTERNAL X INPUT X Function execute REMOTE mode Figure 6-2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / PANEL SLEEP TIME [PANEL SLEEP TIME] Range OFF.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1. Description Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.kr 6.entecene.6.6. 6. 6.co.5. Input logic ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 91 .

NT http://www. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Func [OPTO INPUT SET] Range NONE.01 ~ 9. TRIP. OUT8 RESET >I1 Func: NONE I1 Debounce: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.99 sec I1 Func: NONE >I1 Debounce: 0. NONE TRIP CLOSE PROTECTION GROUND SEF Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable RECLOSE CONTROL ALTERNATE SETTINGS Enable/Disable Locked/Unlocked Enable/Disable PROGRAM1 PROGRAM2 HOT LINE TAG Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable FAULT INDICATION OUTPUT RELAY BATTERY LOAD TEST RESET 1∼8 RESET. … . For more details.01 sec I2 Func: NONE Enter debounce time to prevent chattering in Input Input 2 ~ Input 8.entecene.02 Default 0. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Debounce [OPTO INPUT SET] Range 0.02 Step 0.6. the same as Input 1 above 92 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . refer to “Appendix A.2. OPTO INPUT FUNCTION”.kr 6.02 Default NONE Step ~ I2 Func: NONE Enter the function of External input terminal Opto input can have following functions.

1.entecene.etc ) Function Occurrence Status LCD Display S/R LATCH Pulse T Type PULSE Y OUTxx Relay Latch LATCH S Q R OPTO INPUT SET(OUTxx Reset) Pulse OUTPUT RELAY TEST 2s Figure 6-3. Output Relay Set .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.7. Output logic ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 93 .59.NT http://www.co. Description Menu to set External Output Terminal Function and Output type The output relay is available as an ordering option.51.7.kr 6... Protective Elements Relay Setting ( 50.27.Option 6.

52B* SYSTEM OK* CLOSE BLOCK* MECHANISM LOCK* GAS LOW LOCK* EXT’ TRIP LOCK* HIGH CURRENT INST FAULT* DELAY FAULT* LOCKOUT FAULT* PHASE FAULT* GROUND FAULT* SEF FAULT* NEQ FAULT* For more detail. To turn it off. LATCH: Output signal is delivered once this function ON.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Type [OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range PULSE.05 S/R LATCH: Output signal is delivered only this function activates (ON).7. LATCH. NONE TRIP CLOSE FAIL TRIP FAIL CLOSE FAIL AC FAIL BATTTERY 27 ELEMENT 59 ELEMENT 25 ELEMENT 81 ELEMENT 79 RESET 79CYCLE 79LOCKOUT SELFCHECK PROTECTION Enable GROUND Enable SEF Enable RECLOSE Enable CONTROL Locked REMOTE Enable ALTERNATE SETTINGS PROGRAM1 Enable PROGRAM2 Enable Enable HOT LINE TAG Enable LO/RE OPEN ALARM CLOSE . To activate Output again. Output Relay can have following function.NT http://www.52A INPUT 1~ 8 GAS LOW* OPEN .co.05 Enter the function of External output terminal. NOTE : The function marked with ‘*’ is an option. NEQ FLT* >O1 Func: NONE O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default NONE Step ~ O1 Pulse T: 0. RELAY OUTPUT FUNCTION”. TRIP. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Func [OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range NONE. PULSE: Output signal is delivered only during PULSE T. refer to “Appendix B.2. turn it ON again.entecene. That function may not be supported by the option type. turn this function OFF and then.kr 6. it needs Reset signal and it is set in “OPTO INPUT SET” 94 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . … . S/R LATCH O1 Func: NONE >O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default S/R LATCH Step ~ O1 Pulse T: 0.

05 Step 0.entecene.99 sec O1 Func: NONE O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 95 .kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Pulse T [OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range 0.05 Sets Duration time if OUTPUT TYPE is PULSE Output 2 ~ 8 is the same as above.01 ~ 99.01 sec >O1 Pulse T: 0.co.NT http://www.

when a fault occurs. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. it is figured as a permanent fault. OCR Function is operated and disconnects the load side.co. when TIEpoint Recloser is closed. the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live line. the current flows in opposite way. Hence. the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed. When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault. Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser. MID point Recloser. Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC) When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates. TIEpoint Recloser (TIE) TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.8. After changed to Alternate setting. TIE point Recloser. OCR Function is operated and the load side is disconnected. After recovering the fault. then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. the line becomes DV status and if it continues.Option The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs. MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. MIDpoint Recloser(MID) When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing Recloser operates.kr 6. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed. During TIEpoint Recloser closed.NT http://www. LV(Live Line Voltage). Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage). connect C/B and when the line becomes LV. Therefore. the line becomes DV and if it continues. When a fault occurs during automatic closing. 96 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side and when both sides become DV. it is figured as a permanent fault. Loop Control . the current flows in opposite way. the recloser trips once and locks out.entecene.

and restores the preset values. Program 1: Enable/Disables Loop control function. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 97 .kr LCD Initial Screen Recloser type that is selected in Loop control. Auto restoration function is. after loop control operation. LOOP CONTROL KEY Use PROGRAM KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel. [LV] LOOP CONTROL [TIE] Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ . [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Load side. AUTO RESTORE T [ .entecene. Figure 6-4.] voltage or Live line voltage.co. MID.]. Program 2: Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of SEC. Loop Control Key Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled.NT http://www.] VSDLT: [ . VL: [DV].] VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ . SEC.]. are displayed on LCD Initial Screen.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Source side. VS: [DV]. MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status. AUTO RESTORE T: [ . [MID]. VLDLT: [ . Press “ENT” KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode. [TIE] Display a selected type.]. LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] . [LV] Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage. Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout. Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled. [RUN] Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.

TIE >Type Select: NONE >VRS . TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A. EVRC2A uses VD(Voltage divider.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1. VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A.Tie: VS Select the Recloser Type and add Loop Control function. VS&VL >Type Select: NONE >VRS .S/M: VS Default VS Step ~ >VRS . CVD or RVD) to measure the voltage. C.B.T phase) Voltage VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes dead line voltage.NT http://www. MID. VL >Type Select: NONE >VRS . Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select [LOOP CONTROL] Range NONE. Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. R phases.Tie: VS Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used in SEC. It measures only A. press Program 1 Key to enable Loop Control. After selecting.T phase) Voltage Standard Model.Tie: VS Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE. phase S and T are not measured. MID.S. NONE : Loop control is not in use.entecene.C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R.B. VL.8. 98 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .S.S/M: VS Default NONE Step ~ >VRS . B.S/M: VS Default VS Step ~ >VRS .co. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie [LOOP CONTROL] Range VS. SEC.C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R.kr 6. SEC : SECtionalizing Recloser MID : MIDpoint Recloser TIE : TIEpoint Recloser PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M [LOOP CONTROL] Range VS.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.T phase are not measured. 3PP. B. 1PN(B). 1PN(A). 1PN(C).kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire [LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN. 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire [LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for VD(CVD or RVD) type Control S. 3PP. C phase voltage.entecene. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.co. VD type Control measures A. 1PP(AB).C phase) voltage sensor(VD or VT) connection type. 1PP(CA) >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default 3PN Step ~ >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A. 1PN(A). 1PN(C). 1PP(BC).T phase) voltage sensor(VD or VT) connection type. 1PP(CA) >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default 3PN Step ~ >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R. 1PP(BC). 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 99 . 1PN(B).B.S.NT http://www. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. 1PP(AB).

ON(VS). To use this function. OFF : Turn off auto change.Mid [LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF. ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL. ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL. after set time (LL Regain T).co. OFF : Turn off auto change. ON(VL). Loop control (setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt. 100 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting.entecene. Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting. Loop control (setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same. after set time (LL Regain T).RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ON : Turn on auto change. ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS. ON >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default OFF Step ~ >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Set Value is used in MID.NT http://www. To use this function. ON(BOTH) >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE Default OFF Step ~ >LC After Op:DISABLE Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt-Tie [LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF.

Manual open is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl [LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE. DISABLE : After Manual open. Loop control function is automatically activated.00 Default 10. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL [LOOP CONTROL] Range 1. Loop control function is not automatically activated. DISABLE : After Manual close.NT http://www. To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by Manual operation.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENABLE >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >LC After Op:DISABLE Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE. To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is opened by manual operation.0 Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE. TIE opens by Loop control. PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.00 sec >OT Both DL: 10. When Loop control function is enabled. Loop control function is not automatically activated. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op [LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 101 .00 ~ 600.entecene. When Loop control function is enabled. Loop control function is automatically activated.01 sec >DL V Max(%): 50. After TIE closed. source and load sides become dead line for a certain period. PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on. (Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it) ENABLE : After Manual open.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it) ENABLE : After Manual close.co. ENABLE >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ >LC After Op:DISABLE Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC.00 Step 0.

it automatically changes to Alternate Setting. After it becomes Live line. it figures as a fault and Trip Lockout. it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.00 ~ 600.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. a certain period later. MID. In Live Line. it determines Live Line. Live Line becomes Tie Close. In Load side. when a voltage is increased over a set value.co. In Load side. if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. and when Loop control (“Chg Alt-Tie” is on. and during operation.0 Step 0. SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. In Source side. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL V Min(%) [LOOP CONTROL] Range 50. it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”. After opened. 102 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . the voltage becomes Live Line.0 ~ 85.00 Default 50. After Loop control.entecene. it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”.0 Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage.00 Default 70. it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”. when a voltage is decreased below a set value.01 sec >DL V Max(%): 50. In Source side.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T [LOOP CONTROL] Range 1.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 5.NT http://www.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Step 0.1 % >DL V Max(%): 50. it determines Dead Line.00 sec >OT Both DL: 10. Restore (auto close and change to Primary setting). PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL V Max(%) [LOOP CONTROL] Range 20. restores (Automatic Close).0 % >LL V Min(%): 70. In Dead Line.0 Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC.00 Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage.1 % >LL Regain T: 10. This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enabled.0 Step 0. MID.0 % >OT Both DL: 10.0 ~ 70.

00 sec >LL V Min(%): 70. SEC’s reset Time shall be longer than MID 5 seconds.00 >DL Reset T: 5. MID changes Settings from Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Mid is enable).00 ~ 600. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Time [LOOP CONTROL] Range 1.00 Default 5.01 sec >NRT After LC: 10.00 Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and during reset time.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL Pickup T [LOOP CONTROL] Range 1.00 Step 0. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL Regain T [LOOP CONTROL] Range 1. “DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation. the line shall not be Live Line.00 sec >LL V Min(%): 70.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.00 Dead Bus Reset Time : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time from “DL Pickup T”. Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T” Timer. When timer is finished.00 Step 0.00 ~ 600. This timer operates when “DL Pickup T” is set and the line becomes Live line.00 Default 50. TIE can operate. and TIE is closed automatically after changing settings form Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Tie is enable).00 sec >LL Regain T: 10.00 Default 10.entecene.01 sec >LL Regain T: 10.00 Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”. and MID’s shall be longer than TIE’s 5 seconds.01 sec >LL Regain T: 10. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 103 .co. SEC is opened.00 Step 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the line becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that SEC.NT http://www.00 ~ 600. MID. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or recloser’s reclosing time.

01 sec >NRT After LC: 10. If a fault occurs and MID trips after a set time.co.00 Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in MID.00 sec >LL Regain T: 10. After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings.kr PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LC [LOOP CONTROL] Range 0.00 ~ 600. trips once and lockout.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. If a fault occurs and TIE trips after a set time. TIE also.00 Step 0. if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set time.00 >DL Reset T: 5.00 Default 10. reclosing is executed. 104 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . reclosing is executed. TIE. MID reclose.entecene. After “LL Regain T”. when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set time. This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a fault after Loop control.NT http://www. MID trips once and lockouts. while backward distributing line operating.

2. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 105 .entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 6.8.NT http://www.co. Loop Control Logic Diagram Figure 6-5.

NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene.kr Figure 6-6.co. MID Point Recloser Logic 106 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .

co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. TIE Point Recloser Logic ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 107 .kr Figure 6-7.NT http://www.entecene.

In “Table 6-3. 108 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . 5. 5-Reclosers Setting SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2 Type Select . RC2. X 10.NT http://www.3. Loop Control Application 5-Reclosers Loop Control For five reclosers loop control. 5-Reclosers Setting”. ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE - PROGRAM 2 .00 5. ←⎯⎯ VS ←⎯⎯ VS X ⎯⎯→ VS ⎯⎯→ VS - VRS – Tie . 5sec-2nd reclose. X X 10.0 50.0 22.0 - LL Regain T . ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE - Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose. X X VS&VL X X - VS Wire . - OT Both DL .00 10.entecene.00 - NRT After LC .00 10.00 X - PROGRAM 1 . 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used.kr 6.0 70.00 5.00 5.co.0 22.0 50. . 2 sets of MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser).00 5.00 15.0 22. X ON X ON X - Cng Alt-Tie .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC-MID-TIE.0 70. 22.00 5.00 5. 5. RC5 are installed for CB2 side.0 - DL Pickup T .00 10. 5.0 50.00 X X - Auto Rest’ T . 50.00 5.00 10.0 22. it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser).0 - LL V Min(%) . RC3 are installed for CB1 side.00 - DL Reset T .00 - DL V Max(%) .00 5.0 70. X ENABLE X . 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) - Cng Alt-Mid . ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE - LC After Op . 70. SEC MID TIE MID SEC - VRS – S/M . And the source side bushings of RC4. 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN - VL Wire . Table 6-3.0 70.8.00 5. X X ON X X - LC After Cl .0 50. the source side bushings of RC1.

MID shall have longer time set than SEC.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. When a line is Dead Line. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 109 . Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line. During CB1 operation. and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time. change MID(RC2). the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. “LL Regain T” operates. SEC. CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn. SEC(RC1). TIE has the same setting time. MID. accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set. TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3). MID(RC2). 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. When “LL Regain T” is enable. TIE(RC3) operate. MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.NT http://www. TIE shall have longer time set than MID. Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation. SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto- Restoration Time.co. Step4 : After removing a Fault. SEC(RC1) is opened automatically.kr 5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault Figure 6-8. and then automatically close.entecene. then. close CB1.

MID(RC2). 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2. SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically. TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to Alternate setting. TIE point recloser has the same setting time.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. When “LL Regain T” is enable. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set. MID. and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line. 110 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene. F2 is isolated by Loop control operation. MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn. then. When the line is Dead Line. Step5 : After removing a Fault. During SEC(RC1) operation. Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished.co. TIE shall have longer time set than MID. accumulate Dead line time. MID(RC3) automatically changes to Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time. close SEC(RC1). and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. “LL Regain T” operates. TIE(RC3) operate.NT http://www.kr 5-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault Figure 6-9. Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3). the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.

TIE(RC3) operate. close MID(RC3) Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3). TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3). accumulate Dead line time. MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”.kr 5-Reclosers Loop control at F3 Fault Figure 6-10. and recover the previous the line as the previous normal line.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 111 . During MID(RC2) operation.NT http://www. “LL Regain T” operates. TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault. Step4 : After removing the fault. When “LL Regain T” is enable.co. When the line is Dead Line. F3 is isolated by Loop control operation.

0 50. RC2 are installed for CB1 side.kr 3-Reclosers Loop Control For three .00 - DL Reset T . X 10. - OT Both DL .00 X - Auto Rest’ T . X 10. 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser).0 22. 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used. Table 6-4. 5sec-2nd reclose. Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE. X ON X - LC After Cl . SEC TIE SEC - VRS – S/M . ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE - PROGRAM 2 .0 - DL Pickup T . 50.00 - DL V Max(%) . 112 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . And the source side bushings of RC3 are installed for CB2 side.0 50. 3-Reclosers Setting”. In “Table 6-4. 5.00 5. the source side bushings of RC1. 5.entecene. ←⎯⎯VS X ⎯⎯→VS - VRS – Tie .0 - LL V Min(%) . 3PN 3PN 3PN - VL Wire . X VS&VL X - VS Wire .00 5. ENABLE X ENABLE - LC After Op .0 70. .00 X - PROGRAM 1 . 70.co.00 - NRT After LC . X X X - Cng Alt-Tie .00 10.0 70. 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) - Cng Alt-Mid .00 5.reclosers loop control. 3-Reclosers Setting SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2 Type Select . it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser).0 - LL Regain T . 22.00 5.0 22.00 5. 5. ENABLE X ENABLE - Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose.NT http://www. ENABLE .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time.entecene. SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto Restoration Time. TIE has the same setting time. “LL Regain T” operates. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1. When a line is Dead Line. the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.kr 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault Figure 6-11.co. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set. CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation. During CB1 operation. SEC. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn. Step3 : After removing the fault.NT http://www. TIE(RC2) operate. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 113 . SEC(RC1). close CB1. SEC(RC1) is opened automatically. TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. When “LL Regain T” is finished. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. TIE shall have longer time set than SEC.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”.

When a line is Dead Line. and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time.entecene. “LL Regain T” operates. accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set. 114 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . MID(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2. TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.kr 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault Figure 6-12. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2. When closing TIE(RC2).NT http://www. close SEC(RC1).co. Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. During SEC(RC1) operation. Step3 : After removing the fault. SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 115 . In this case.kr 6.Option Sometimes. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP/ SET GROUP CHANGE / Time interval [SET GROUP CHANGE] Range 10~180sec >Function: DISABLE >Time interval: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec If power flow is changed for this set time. During fault detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition. y This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current. Set Group Change .9. it is necessary to change Protection setting. Primary setting is applied if power flow is forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is reverse(backward).ENABLE >Function: DISABLE >Time interval: 30 Default DISABLE Step ~ Set whether to use Set Group Change. Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). setting group is changed. Applying rules y This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition.NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SET GROUP CHANGE / Function [SET GROUP CHANGE] Range DISABLE.entecene. And these settings can be selected automatically by “Set Group Change” function. it does not work.co. When this function is used. EVRC2A has two options includes Primary Setting and Alternate Setting to help in this situation.

Refer to “11.80 Step 0. Power Quality – Option” for more information.4. Outage time. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Func (Option) [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable. press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Power Quality – Option” for more information. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage. Enable >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 Default Disable Step ~ >SAG Func: Disable It is to set event recording of supply outage enable or disable.co.” Refer to “11. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~3600 sec >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 Default 20 Step 1 sec >SAG Func: Disable It is to set event recording detect supply outage and to set time to get recovered from supply outage. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.01 >SAG Pickup: 0.4.80 Set a detect level of Voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Power Quality elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below. “MAINTENANCE” and “EVENT RECORDER.95 × VT(secondary nominal voltage) >S-O Duration: 20 >SAG Func: Disable Default 0.Option Place the curser on “10. number of times and duration can be viewed in menu.NT http://www. Power Quality . POWER QUALITY” in SYSTEM SETUP menu. Enable >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 Default Disable Step ~ >SAG Func: Disable It is to set event recording of sag enable or disable.kr 6. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable.10. 116 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .30 ~ 0.

20 Default 1. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1~60 cycle >SWL Func: Disable >SWL Pickup: 1.80 >SAG Duration: 5 Default Disable Step ~ >SWL Func: Disable It is to set event recording of swell enable or disable.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable.05 ~ 1.kr SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1~60 cycle >SAG Func: Disable >SAG Pickup: 0.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage) >SWL Func: Disable >SWL Pickup: 1. Enable >SAG Pickup: 0.20 Step 0.0 It is to set event recording of current unbalance enable or disable.NT http://www. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 117 .co.80 Default 5 Step 1 >SAG Duration: 5 Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).entecene. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A- N6.20 Default 5 Step 1 >SWL Duration: 20 Set a detect time for voltage swell(voltage high).NT. Enable >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 Default Disable Step ~ >UBI Duration: 4. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.01 >SWL Duration: 20 Set a detect level of voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.

then current unbalance status point does not maked.12 of EVRC2A- N6. Current unbalance is calculated by following formula.NT http://www.0 Step 0. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.NT.NT.12 of EVRC2A-N6.1 ~ 60. 118 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.12 of EVRC2A-N6.0 Set a detect level of current unbalance for Power Quality.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. I2 UI rate = × 100 I1 NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.entecene.kr SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~ 100 % >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 Default 30 Step 1% >UBI Duration: 4.0 Default 10 Step 1A >UBI Limit: 10 Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6. If load current is smaller this level. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Limit (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 0 ~ 630 A >UBI Pickup: 30 >UBI Duration: 4.NT.0 Set a detect time of current unbalance.1 sec >UBI Duration: 4.0 sec >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 Default 4. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.

0 Set a detect level of voltage unbalance for Power Quality. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 119 . SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.co.12 of EVRC2A-N6.NT.0 Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.kr SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT. Enable >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 Default Disable Step ~ >UBV Duration: 4.0 Step 0. V2 UVrate = × 100 V1 NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.1 sec >UBV Duration: 4.NT http://www.0 It is to set event recording of voltage unbalance enable or disable.0 sec >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 Default 4. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.entecene.12 of EVRC2A-N6. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~ 100 % >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 Default 30 Step 1% >UBV Duration: 4.NT.12 of EVRC2A-N6. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6. Voltage unbalance is calculated by following formula.1 ~ 60.

ANSI Designations 120 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene.co. Protective Elements Block Diagram .NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 7.ANSI Designations Figure 7-1. PROTECTION Protective Elements Block diagram .

entecene. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations Protective Elements ANSI Designations Four shot recloser 79 Phase fast time overcurrent 51P1 Ground fast time overcurrent 51G1 Negative sequence fast time overcurrent 46(51)-1 Phase delay time overcurrent 51P2 Ground delay time overcurrent 51G2 Negative sequence delay time overcurrent 46(51)-2 Sensitive Earth Fault protection 51SEF Phase directional time control 67P Ground directional time control 67G Negative sequence directional time control 67I2 Directional Sensitive Earth Fault 67SEF Phase instantaneous high current trip 50P1 Ground instantaneous high current trip 50G1 Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip 46(50)1 Phase High current trip lockout 50P2 Ground High current trip lockout 50G2 Negative sequence High current trip lockout 46(50)2 Under voltage 1 27-1 Under voltage 2 27-2 Over voltage 1 59-1 Over voltage 2 59-2 Under frequency 81U Over frequency 81O Synchronism check 25 Cold load pickup Sequence coordination Loss of Phase ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 121 .co.ANSI Designations Table 7-1.NT http://www.kr Protective Elements .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the reclose logic lockouts. Alternate settings by one operating lockout or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel. If the fault is transient. the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose interval time expires.1.entecene. and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer. If this continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element. This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip operations 122 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF [OPERATIONS] Range 1~5 Lockout-PHA: 4 Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1 >Lockout-SEF: 4 Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.co.kr 7. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five. The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary.NT http://www. This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip operations. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA [OPERATIONS] Range 1~5 >Lockout-PHA: 4 Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1 Lockout-SEF: 4 Select the total number of the phase trip operations. Reclose (79) After a fault has occurred. the Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND [OPERATIONS] Range 1~5 Lockout-PHA: 4 >Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1 Lockout-SEF: 4 Select the total number of the ground trip operations. If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose. The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings. then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic. This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND [OPERATIONS] Range 0~5 Lockout-SEF: 4 Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Default 2 Step 1 >Fast Curve-GND: 2 Select a number for the ground fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining negative sequence delay curve operations. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA [OPERATIONS] Range 0~5 Lockout-GND: 4 Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 2 Step 1 >Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Select the number of the phase fast curve operations.co. This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast curve operations. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ [OPERATIONS] Range 0~5 Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Fast Curve-GND: 2 Default 2 Step 1 >Fast Curve-NEQ: 2 Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 123 .kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ [OPERATIONS] Range 1~5 Lockout-GND: 4 Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 4 Step 1 >Lockout-NEQ: 4 Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining ground delay curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining phase delay curve operations.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.NT http://www. This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve operations.

10 ~ 600.60 >Reclose 2: 2.NT http://www.00 Default 15. Reset timer can only count if all the overcurrent elements are cleared.00 sec Reclose 2: 2. If any overcurrent elements are picked up.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 1 [INTERVALS] 0.00 Default 30.00 ~ 600. the Reset time for auto reclose setting is used to set time for a delay longer than the incomplete sequence.00sec Reclose 1: 0.01 sec Reclose 3: 15. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 3 [INTERVALS] Range 1.00 This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation. Traditionally.00 Default 15.00 Default 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(AR) [INTERVALS] Range 1.00 Select Reset time for auto reclose.01 sec This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.11 of EVRC2A) >Reclose 1: 0.00 Step 0.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.00 sec(prior to Ver 6.60 Step 0.00 Reclose 3: 15.00 ~ 600.co.60 Reclose 2: 2. 124 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .00 This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.50 ~ 600.11 of EVRC2A) Reclose 3: 15.01 sec >Reset T(AR): 30.00 sec Reclose 3: 15. the reset timer is reloaded.01 >Reclose 3: 15. The Reset time for auto reclose is used for the recloser to automatically reclose.00 sec Reclose 1: 0.60 Range Reclose 2: 2.00 This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.00 sec(from Ver 6.00 0.01 sec >Reclose 4: 15.entecene.00 ~ 600. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 4 [INTERVALS] Range 1. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 2 [INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.00 Step 0.00 Step 0.00 Reclose 4: 15.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / C/P Wait [INTERVALS] Range 1.0 Default 60. Traditionally.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(LO) [INTERVALS] Range 1.NT http://www.00 Select the close power waiting time.01 sec >C/P Wait: 60.00 Select the Reset time for lockout.00 ~ 600.00 ~ 600.entecene. the reclose logic is locked out. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 125 .01 sec >Reset T(LO): 10. the auto reclose logic automatically resets.00 sec Reset T(AR): 30.co. If no overcurrent trip occurs after a manual close and this timer expires.00 Step 0. If this timer expires. This timer is used to set the close power waiting time delay allowed to reclose.00 Reset T(LO): 10.00 Step 0.00 Reset T(AR): 30. the Reset Time from lockout setting is set shorter than the Reset time for auto reclose setting. The auto reclose logic is disabled for a setting time delay after the recloser is manually/remotely closed.00 sec Reclose 4: 15.00 Default 10. This prevents a fault from manual reclosing. This delay must be longer than the trip time delay for any protection not blocked after manual closing. It is activated when the reclose logic is in the reclose cycle state.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

1. the RECLOSE ENABLED LED in user interface panel is not lighted(ON). AMP (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) FAULT CURRENT * LOCK-OUT * PICKUP CURRENT NORMAL CURRENT TIME (1) 1st Trip .co.3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time (7) 4th Trip .1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (3) 2nd Trip . Lockout The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions : y After a fault of distribution systems. y When the high current lockout has occurred.entecene. The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control and the reset time has expired.4th TCC Figure 7-2. the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not change status of the recloser opened. y After TRIP occurs. Protection sequence containing 2F2D operations followed by lockout 126 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The following diagram shows the typical full protection sequence containing 2F2D (two fast and two delay) operations followed by lockout.kr 7. y The recloser is manually closed and a fault occurs before the expiration of the reset time. y When recloser is manually opened.1. y The close power waiting time delay has expired.2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (5) 3rd Trip .NT http://www.

The following block diagram shows the reset sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 127 .1. AMP (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) FAULT CURRENT AUTO RESET TIME * RESET * PICKUP CURRENT NOMAL CURRENT TIME (1) 1st Trip .1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (3) 2nd Trip . the recloser will operate lockout after the completion of the remaining sequence.2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (5) 3rd Trip .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 7. the reclosing sequence automatically reset after passing the reset time interval. Reset If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition. If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time.2.co.entecene.NT http://www.3rd TCC Figure 7-3.

ESB. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value.entecene. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. In the instantaneous mode. curve type. is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. ANSI. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. USER curves.NT http://www.2. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. ESB. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) The EVRC2A has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI. Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel. the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel. 128 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . or by an remote control or via SCADA. The phase time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value.kr 7. minimum response time setting and reset type.co. The phase time overcurrent element contained in the EVR2A. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system. The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary. time adder. IEC. IEC. time dial.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A.

10 ~ 1600A >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1A S. Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Function [PHASE FAST] Range TRIP. 2. Phase Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.kr Phase Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. TR&AR >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~ Curve: ANSI-STI If function = Trip. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 129 . If function = Trip & AR. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Relays(0-8) [PHASE FAST] Range OFF.entecene.F: OFF Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent elements. the feature is operational. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] Range OFF. TRIP and any other selected output relays operate. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. 1234 : Operate output signal through 1. Trip operates. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition.co. 0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.NT http://www. 0 ~ 8 Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Curve: ANSI-STI Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip. the feature is operational. 4 Output Relay.E. 3.

U2. Very.R. ANSI-NI. Normally.00 ~ 10.01 >Time Dial: 0.00 ~ 10. Very. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Curve [PHASE FAST] Range ANSI-MI.entecene. 130 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Short Inverse ESB : Normally.05 ~ 15.T [PHASE FAST] Range 0.T: 0.50 A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis.00 Step 0. … .NT http://www.10s) IEC : Standard. Extremely.00 An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.00 sec Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Adder [PHASE FAST] Range 0.01 sec >M. Definite Time(1s .50 Default 0.co.U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37 PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Dial [PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip. Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1.00 Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0.U3.00 Step 0. Short Inverse.R.00 sec Time Dial: 0.50 Time Adder: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / M.01 sec >Time Adder: 0.00 Default 0. Long.50 Step 0. even if the time delay is shorter. Extremely. Very. KG(165) Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~ >Curve: ANSI-STI Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately.

LINEAR Time Adder: 0. low set definite time is applied for operation. NT. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%. Instantaneous and Linear.entecene. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time. Two methods of this resetting operation are available. 1 ~ 600sec >M.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. such as most static units.00 Default INST Step ~ >Reset Method: INST Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable.00 M. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 131 .kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Reset Method [PHASE FAST] Range INST. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units.R. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value.00 >Reset Method: INST Default OFF Step 1sec >Low Set DT: OFF Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.R.NT http://www.T: 0.co.03 of EVRC2A-N6. which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold.T: 0. a time overcurrent trip is generated. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays. Phase Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time overcurrent. the variable must be reduced. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time [PHASE FAST] Range OFF.

USER curves.3. ESB. or by an remote control or via SCADA. minimum response time setting and reset type. The ground time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.NT http://www. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel. time dial. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system. The ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) The EVRC2A has two ground time overcurrent elements. ESB. IEC. The ground time overcurrent element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. 132 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . IEC.co. ANSI. USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A. the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. time adder. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the current level measured by the EVRC2A drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel.kr 7.entecene. curve type.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Function [GROUND FAST] Range TRIP. KG(165) Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~ >Curve: ANSI-STI Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately.U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 133 . which will operate the Trip. the feature is operational. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Curve [GROUND FAST] Range ANSI-MI.U3. Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1.NT http://www.U2. Ground Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the ground fast time overcurrent element. Very. Very. Short Inverse ESB : Normally.10s) IEC : Standard. it trips and alarms. Very. Long. TR&AR >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~ Curve: ANSI-STI If function = Trip. Definite Time(1s . Extremely. Extremely. When the feature asserts a TRIP&AR condition.F: OFF Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent elements. Normally. the feature is operational.co. 0 ~ 8 Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Curve: ANSI-STI Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.E. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. … . 10 ~ 1600A >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 Default 250 Step 1A S. Short Inverse. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Relays(0-8) [GROUND FAST] Range OFF.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] Range OFF. If function = Trip & AR.kr Ground Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current. ANSI-NI.

00 sec Time Dial: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Adder [GROUND FAST] Range 0.T: 0. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units.00 Default INST Step ~ >Reset Method: INST Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable.50 Step 0.01 sec >Time Adder: 0.00 The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / M.T [GROUND FAST] Range 0.01 >Time Dial: 0. which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold.00 ~ 10. 134 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .NT http://www.co. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays.R.00 Step 0.00 An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.entecene.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Dial [GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.T: 0.00 Step 0.01 sec >M. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.50 Default 0.50 A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis. a time overcurrent trip is generated. even if the time delay is shorter. such as most static units. Two methods of this resetting operation are available.00 M.00 Default 0.50 Time Adder: 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Reset Method [GROUND FAST] Range INST.00 Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0. Instantaneous and Linear.R. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value. LINEAR Time Adder: 0. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%.05 ~ 15.00 sec Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0. the variable must be reduced.R.

T: 0. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 135 .entecene.00 >Reset Method: INST Default OFF Step 1sec >Low Set DT: OFF Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve.03 of EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www.co. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. NT.R. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time [GROUND FAST] Range OFF. low set definite time is applied for operation. 1 ~ 600sec >M. Ground Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time overcurrent.

co. It is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu. 1 ~ 160A (from Ver 6. The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current.1~16. Control Type”.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs.0 (0.15 of EVRC2A) >S.F: OFF Default OFF Step 1A Set the pickup current of SEF element. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). 136 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.entecene. The VD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded. For SEF element. 0. For user systems. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. the setting range of this item is “OFF. Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [SEF ENABLED] in user interface panel. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. a directional SEF is available.4.E. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s (standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT. NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed.NT http://www. SEF Pickup Current Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / S. Refer to “9.E.F [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] OFF. EVRC2A has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. The SEF element is enabled in the Primary.1A Step)”. NOTE : The user shall request a CT that satisfies the relevant accuracy when setting below 2A so that the SEF element operates properly.15 of EVRC2A) >Phase: 500 Range* >Ground: 250 OFF.4.kr 7. 4 ~ 160A (prior to Ver 6.

NT http://www. If function = Trip & AR.00 If function = Trip. it trips and alarms. the feature is operational.entecene.00 Step 0. TR&AR >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~ Time Delay: 1.co.01 sec >Time Delay: 1.00 The Time delay of Sensitive Earth Fault setting programs a definite time delay for the Sensitive Earth Fault.00 ~ 600. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Time Delay [ SEF ELEMENT ] Range 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Relays(0-8) [ SEF ELEMENT ] Range OFF.kr SEF Element Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Function [ SEF ELEMENT ] Range TRIP.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 0 ~ 8 Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Time Delay: 1. the feature is operational.00 sec Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default 1. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 137 . When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. Trip operates. phase high current trip operates instantaneously. If set to zero.00 Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

NT http://www. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme. minimum response time setting. 138 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] Range OFF.entecene. 10 ~ 1600A Ground: 250 S. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 7. the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) The EVRC2A has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements.E.F: OFF Default OFF Step 1A >NEG Seq: OFF Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent elements. IEC. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. curve type. or by an remote control or via SCADA. Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel. NEG Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the NEQ pickup current. time dial. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. and reset type.co. USER curves. time adder.5. In the instantaneous mode. ESB. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel. current pickup value. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI.

TRIP and any other selected output relays operate.10s) IEC : Standard. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Function [NEG SEQ FAST] Range TRIP. Short Inverse ESB : Normally.01 >Time Dial: 0. 0 ~ 8 Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Curve: ANSI-STI Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.co. Long. Trip operates. Definite Time(1s . Very. Short Inverse. … . Extremely.U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37 PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial [NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0. the feature is operational.NT http://www. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition.00 Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-SI Default 0. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 139 .05 ~ 15.kr Negative Sequence Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the negative sequence fast time overcurrent element.50 A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis.entecene. Very. TR&AR >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~ Curve: ANSI-STI If function = Trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Relays(0-8) [NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.U3. If function = Trip & AR. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve [NEG SEQ FAST] Range ANSI-MI. the feature is operational. Extremely. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. Very. ANSI-NI.U2. KG(165) Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~ >Curve: ANSI-STI Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately.50 Step 0. Normally. Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1.

LINEAR Time Adder: 0. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units. low set definite time is applied for operation.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 140 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . NT.T: 0.T: 0.00 M. which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold.T: 0.00 Step 0. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%.R.01 sec >M.R. Two methods of this resetting operation are available. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time.00 Default 0.00 ~ 10.00 The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip. such as most static units.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Adder [NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 >Reset Method: INST Default OFF Step 1sec >Low Set DT: OFF Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method [NEG SEQ FAST] Range INST. NOTE : This setting is supported from vesion 6.entecene.00 ~ 10. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / M. the variable must be reduced. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays. a time overcurrent trip is generated. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time [NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF.R.00 An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.01 sec >Time Adder: 0.R.00 sec Time Dial: 0.NT http://www.50 Default 0.50 Time Adder: 0. Instantaneous and Linear.00 sec Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0. 1 ~ 600sec >M. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value. even if the time delay is shorter.00 Default INST Step ~ >Reset Method: INST Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable.co.T [NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 Step 0. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.03 of EVRC2A- N6.

kr Negative Sequence Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The negative sequence delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the negative sequence fast time overcurrent.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.NT http://www.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 141 .

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High Current Trip Element.NT http://www. The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF. The phase high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 4000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1) The EVRC2A has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the EVRC2A. the feature is not operational. it trips and alarms.6. 142 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. TRIP. Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel. The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase high current trip.co. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 4000 Set the pickup current of Phase High Current Trip Element. is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 4000 If function = OFF.kr 7. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. Trip operates.entecene. If function = Trip. the feature is operational. the feature is operational. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Function [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary. If function = Trip & AR.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 143 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.00 ~ 10.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 0.NT http://www. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0.co. the feature is not operate.entecene. If Active Trip = 2. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF.00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF.01 sec >Time Delay: 0. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.00 Step 0.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 Default 0. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero.

The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current trip.NT http://www.kr 7. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Trip Element.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the feature is not operational.entecene. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 4000 If function = OFF. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Function [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF. The ground high current trip element is enabled in the Primary. 144 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . The ground high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF. TRIP.7. If function = Trip & AR. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 4000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) The EVRC2A has a ground high current trip element. The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. the feature is operational. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 4000 Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Trip Element. If function = Trip. it trips and alarms. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. Trip operates. the feature is operational. The ground high current trip element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. Alternate settings both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel.co.

kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0. the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 145 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.00 Step 0. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation. If set to zero.co.entecene.NT http://www.00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 Default 0.00 ~ 10.01 sec >Time Delay: 0.00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF.

NT http://www. it trips and alarms. Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] on user interface panel. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 4000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The negative sequence high current trip element is enabled in the Primary. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. the feature is operational. High Current Trip Element. If function = Trip. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 4000 If function = OFF.co. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) The negative sequence high current trip in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. High Current Trip Element. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. the feature is not operational. The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Function [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF.entecene. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for negative sequence high current trip. If function = Trip & AR.8. Trip operates. The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. TRIP. 146 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . the feature is operational.kr 7. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 4000 Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.

the feature is not operate.00 ~ 10.00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.01 sec >Time Delay: 0. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF.co. If set to zero.00 Step 0. If Active Trip = 2.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 0.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 147 .00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 Default 0.00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.NT http://www.

9. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 8000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value. the feature is operational. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 8000 If function = OFF. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary.co. The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase high current trip. The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. Alternate setting and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel. Trip operates. time delay and fault current. When high current lockout element is enabled. The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout.entecene. 148 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .kr 7. The phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. The phase high current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. If function = Trip & AR. high current lockout element is operated prior to any other phase protection elements. the feature is not operational. Lockout is operated.NT http://www. TRIP. it trips and alarms. If function = Trip. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF. The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase high current trip element. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) The EVRC2A has a phase high current lockout element. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the feature is operational.

00 Step 0.01 sec >Time Delay: 0.co.00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.00 ~ 10.entecene. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0.NT http://www. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 149 .00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 Default 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 8000 Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element. If Active Trip = 2.00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Lockout Element. the feature is not operate. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF.

The ground high current lockout element in the EVRC2A. If function = Trip.co. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) The EVRC2A has a ground high current lockout element. TRIP. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF. The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. it trips and alarms. The ground high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary. the feature is not operational.kr 7. Trip operates. 150 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . The ground high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. the feature is operational. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 8000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. If function = Trip & AR.entecene. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www.10. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Lockout Element. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 8000 If function = OFF. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current lockout. Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. the feature is operational. The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground high current trip element. is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 8000 Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.

00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the feature is not operate. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF.00 Step 0.co.00 ~ 10. If Active Trip = 2. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 0.01 sec >Time Delay: 0. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation. If set to zero. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 151 .00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 Default 0.NT http://www.

The negative sequence high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF. Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. 152 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF. The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence high current trip element. the feature is operational. Trip operates.NT http://www. The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout. Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(A): 8000 If function = OFF. the feature is not operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition. it trips and alarms. If function = Trip.entecene. If function = Trip & AR. The negative sequence high current lockout element provides a definite time delay characteristic versus current. Negative sequence high current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(A): 8000 Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) The EVRC2A has a negative sequence high current lockout element.kr 7. TRIP. the feature is operational.11.

00 ~ 10. High Current Lockout Element. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 0.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 8000 Step 1A >Pickup(A): 8000 Set the pickup current of Negative Seq.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 Default 0.NT http://www. then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.00 The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. the feature is not operate. If set to zero.entecene.01 sec >Time Delay: 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF.00 Step 0.00 Default OFF Step 1 >Active Trip: OFF If Active Trip = OFF. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 153 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. If Active Trip = 2. phase high current trip operates instantaneously.co. 1 ~ 5 Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High Current Lockout Element.

an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number of shots. the algorithm of cold load pickup function is applied at the restoration of load supply. the decision is made when a recloser is closed (52A) by local or remote control. SEF or negative phase over current element.entecene. the overcurrent protection element will be operated under settings of “CLPU-Type 1” function at the restoration of load supply.12. If the “Make use ‘1’” is set to be “YES”. In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated. NOTE: According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”.12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the Fast overcurrent protection element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function. When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage.1. the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed.co. a reactor or a long-distance line. If “YES” is set. the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set.kr 7. the inrush current over overcurrent pickup level may occur. A power is lost and then after certain outage time. Cold Load Pickup – Type 1 The settings of “CLPU-Type 1” are separated and set respectively for phase. Cold Load Pickup The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. ground. 7. the algorithm 154 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . At occurrence of the cold load pickup. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function) If a fault occurs on distributed system.NT http://www. EVRC2A provides “CLPU-Type 1” to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current occurring by the closing of device on a power line and “CLPU-Type 2” to prevent protection elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer. EVRC2A increases the pickup level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 155 . the cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual close or restoration of load current. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs. the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush Current 1 in “Figure 7-5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration of load current). Non Trip Area Trip Area Time Delay Curve Current Overcurrent Cold load Pickup Level Pickup Level Figure 7-4. the recloser is closed manually. the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time. the protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately. the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of the cold load pickup current.entecene.kr is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain outage time. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules. If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load pickup current. protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time (RMT) is expired.co. The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR).NT http://www. If “NO” is set.

the high current trip and high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function. (Refer the Inrush Current 2 in “Figure 7-5.NT http://www.kr If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current. 156 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Current Outage time Restore Minimum Time Inrush current 1 CLPU Trip Pickup Level Inrush current 2 Trip Overcurrent Pickup Level Inrush current 3 Time Figure 7-5. However.co. protection functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT).entecene. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). After RMT. the protection functions are operated. if the over current is dropped below overcurrent pickup current during the RMT. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the Inrush Current 3 in “Figure 7-5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Down If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)). Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.co. over 30 min after power loss. Over Current Pickup Level Step Up At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A). when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. after 60 min. ⎛ Without Supply Time ⎞ Operational Cold Load Multi' = 1 + ⎜⎜ × ( E − CLP Multi' −1) ⎟⎟ ⎝ E − CLP Time ⎠ As example. Cold Load Pickup – Type 2 In the state of cold load.NT http://www. the current of Over Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1.0 and 60 min respectively. If the minimum working currentis set to be 200A. the current of Over Current Pickup is risen as follows. NOTE: The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. twice as much as the minimum working current. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working current. the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.kr 7.0 and 60min respectively. This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user. the graph of the cold load multiple in “Figure 7-6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 157 .2. In addition. this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line. When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3. the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A.12.). the applied cold load multiple is 2.entecene. incoming heavy load etc.

CLPU COMMON Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Function [CLPU-COMMON] Range OFF. 158 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Relays [CLPU-COMMON] Range OFF. it trips and alarms. Cold Load Pickup Setup The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.co. Cold Load Multipilier 7. the feature is operational.NT http://www.3. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. the feature is not operational.entecene. If function = Trip. 0 ~ 8 Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Make use ‘I’: NO Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip. TRIP.12. If function = Trip & AR. the feature is operational.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr Figure 7-6. TR&AR >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~ Make use ‘I’: NO If function = OFF.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / PHA [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 10 ~ 20000A >PHA(A): 2000 GND(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A >SEF(A): 20 Selects the raised pickup current for the phase overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated. If “YES” is set. Control Type”. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / SEF [CLPU-TYPE1] Range* 4 ~ 2000A PHA(A): 2000 GND(A): 2000 Default 20 Step 1A >SEF(A): 20 Selects the raised pickup current for the SEF overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated.4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / GND [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 10 ~ 20000A >PHA(A): 2000 >GND(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A >SEF(A): 20 Selects the raised pickup current for the ground overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated. the setting range of this item is “0.0A (0.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Make use ‘I’ [CLPU-COMMON] Range NO.entecene. If “NO” is set.co. the cold load pickup function is activated when a recloser is manually closed by local or remote control. CLPU-TYPE1 Setup This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 159 . the cold load pickup function is activated when a load current is restored (over 2A).NT http://www. Refer to “9.YES Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Default NO Step ~ >Make use ‘I’: NO This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup function.4~200. It is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu.1A Step)”.

0 Step 0.entecene.0 Default 5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.00 sec SEF(A): 2000 NEQ(A): 2000 Default 10. Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level).01 sec >RMT Time: 5. Inrush current restraint algorithm remains.00 ~ 600. ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time). OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time).0 Select the outage time required for a open of recloser to be considered cold. ON Outage Time: 10. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Outage Time [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 0.01 sec >Outage Time: 10.00 Step 0.00 ~ 600.00 Outage Time: 10.co. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Func-PHA [CLPU-TYPE1] Range OFF. Figure 7-7.00 sec NEQ(A): 2.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1/ NEQ [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 10 ~ 20000A GND(A): 2000 SEF(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A >NEQ(A): 2000 Selects the raised pickup current for the negative sequence overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated.00 Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load. 160 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Outage Time Logic Diagram PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Time [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 0.0 RMT Time: 5.NT http://www. The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal pickup level. Lower than over current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst Time- PHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and over current protection function operates.00 Default ON Step ~ >RMT Func-PHA: ON Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function.

If the cold load currents drop below nominal pickup levels.1.co. During this set time. RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG.NT http://www.entecene.60 Step 0. the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied for overcurrent pickup current.01 sec >Reset Time: 0. the overcurrent pickup level is risen or dropped. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 161 .60 Select the cold load reset time required for the inrush load.0 >E-CLP Multi’: 2.1 Set the multiple of cold load. If OFF is set.0 (OFF).00 sec RMT Func-SEF: ON RMT Func-NEQ: ON Default 0.0 Step 0. NOTE : RMT Func-GND.0~5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the same as RMT Func- PHA above. the cold load pickup feature is returned the normal sequence when the cold load reset time expires.kr ※.0 >E-CLP Time(m): 10 Default 10 Step 1 Set the cold load time.0 E-CLP Time(m): 10 Default 2.00 ~ 600. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2/ E-CLP Time [CLPU-TYPE2] Range 1~720min >E-CLP Multi’: 2. CLPU-TYPE2 Setup This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2 / E-CLP Multi’ [CLPU-TYPE2] Range 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Reset Time [CLPU-TYPE1] Range 0.

add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. The directional Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders.13. the phase direction control will lose direction and will not trip. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠300 degree over V1. NOTE : In case of VD(CVD or RVD) type Recloser.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. sensitive ground.kr 7.1. The directional controls have each three settings. The phase direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.co. voltage and current phasors. EVRC2A only measures voltages without checking directional elements. If directional controls are selected. neutral. Directional Controls (67) The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional controls settings can be different in the Primary and Alternate settings. The directional controls are composed of phase. as determined by the connection of the phase CTs.13. The maximum torque angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. Following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I1 directional polarization in the complex plane. when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage. Phase Directional Controls (67P) The positive sequence voltage V1 provides the direction of phase pole in the power system. which is non-directional.entecene. and negative sequence overcurrent elements. selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA). 162 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . To increase security of all directional controls. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the phase overcurrent element. 7.NT http://www. The phase direction is determined as comparing the positive sequence voltage(V1) to the direction of the positive sequence current(I1).

the faulted angle of the phase will be approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 163 .20 OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.co.V: 0.A [PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree Type: OFF >M.P.A: 300 Default 300 Step 1 degree M.kr Polarizing Referance Voltage: V1 Typical Fault Angle Ze ro T e orq Lin ue ue o rq I1 T Lin um im e M ax Maximum Torque Angle : set 300 degree ard rw Fo rse ve Re Figure 7-8.20 Enter the Maximum Torque Angle.T. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / Type [PHASE DIRECTION] Range OFF.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.V: 0.T. REV >Type: OFF M.entecene.NT http://www.A: 300 Default OFF Step ~ M. FOR. For typical distribution systems. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing voltage.T.P.

01 >M.1 this setting is applied conversely.co. If BLOCK OC = NO. The ground direction control can be programmed to either non-direction or provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only. For example.V: 0.P. The ground direction is determined as comparing the zero sequence voltage(3V0) to the direction of the zero sequence current(Ig).20 Step 0. PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / BLOCK OC [PHASE DIRECTION] Range NO.V. Ground Directional Controls (67G) The zero sequence voltage 3V0 provides the direction of ground control in the power system. 164 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .P.2. which is non-directional. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M. 7. “NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M.entecene.20 Default NO Step ~ >BLOCK OC: NO The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage.T.T.NT http://www.V: 0.P.P. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked. YES M. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5.A: 300 M.13.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the ground overcurrent element. the ground direction control will lose direction and will not trip.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage) Type: OFF M.V.P. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over 3V0.20 Enter the minimum polarizing voltage as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. If BLOCK OC = YES.V [PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.A: 300 Default 0.

T. Phasor Diagram for Ig Directional Polarization The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled. -V0 ne Li ue Fault Current rq Ze To Ig ro um To im rq ax ue M Li ne d ar rw Fo e rs ve Re Polarizing Referance V0 Voltage: Figure 7-9.co. FOR.20 OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 165 .entecene.P.NT http://www.A: 135 Default OFF Step ~ M.V: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / Type [GROUND DIRECTION] Range OFF.kr The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for Ig directional polarization in the complex plane. REV >Type: OFF M.

V [GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.20 Step 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree M.T.A: 135 M.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.V.V: 0. If BLOCK OC = NO. The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.co. If BLOCK OC = YES.P. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.T.20 Enter the maximum torque angle.1 this setting is applied conversely.V will be approximately 0.20 Default NO Step ~ >BLOCK OC: NO The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.20 x VT.P.entecene.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / M.P.T.T.V: 0.V. the ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage) Type: OFF M.P.A: 135 Default 0. “NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M. this M.10 x VT. YES M. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5.V: 0. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals.NT http://www. For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals.V will be approximately 0. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M.P. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.01 >M. PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION/DIRECTION/GROUND DIRECTION/BLOCK OC [GROUND DIRECTION] Range NO.P.P.A [GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree Type: OFF >M. For example. 166 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .20 Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.

kr 7. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over V2.NT http://www. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage.entecene. The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I2 directional polarization in the complex plane.13.3. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the negative sequence overcurrent element which is non-directional.co. The negative sequence direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only. 7. The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The negative sequence direction control is determined as comparing the negative sequence voltage(V2) to the direction of the negative sequence current(I2).13.4. the negative sequence direction control will lose direction and will not trip.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 167 . SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46)) The negative sequence voltage V2 provides the direction of negative sequence pole in the power system.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / Type [NEQ DIRECTION] Range OFF. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled. REV >Type: OFF M.co.T.A: 135 Default OFF Step ~ M.A: 135 Default 135 Step 1 degree M. The maximum torque angle setting determines the directional operating current for the polarizing voltage.T.20 OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.V: 0.entecene.kr -V2 ne Li ue Fault Current rq Ze To ro I2 um To im rq ax ue M Li ne Maximum Torque Angle : set 135 degree d ar rw Fo e rs ve Re Polarizing Referance Voltage: V2 Figure 7-10.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.20 Enter the maximum torque angle.V: 0.P. FOR.P. 168 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .T.NT http://www.A [NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree Type: OFF >M.

“NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M.V: 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / BLOCK OC [NEQ DIRECTION] Range NO.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.P.T.V will be approximately 0.P. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.P. If BLOCK OC = YES.NT http://www.V. YES M.P. For example.V: 0.1 this setting is applied conversely.A: 135 Default 0.20 Step 0. If BLOCK OC = NO. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5. then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.V will be approximately 0.P. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 169 .20 x VT.entecene.T.V.01 >M.co.P.V [NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals.20 Default NO Step ~ >BLOCK OC: NO The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.P.10 x VT. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M.20 Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.A: 135 M. this M.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage) Type: OFF M.

When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. Alternate settings. alarm and control when the voltage drops below a specified voltage for a specified time. If function = Trip. it trips and alarms. the feature is not operational.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(xVT): 0.kr 7.14. any two phase and three phase.co. Undervoltage 1 Setup The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent protective elements. Undervoltage (27) Two undervoltage elements are provided for trip. To increase security.70 If function = OFF. the feature is operational. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls. If function = Trip & AR. The undervoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(xVT): 0. all undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Function [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8) [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF.70 Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.NT http://www. the feature is operational.entecene. The undervoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary. 170 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . TRIP. the undervoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods.

2P.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip condition. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 171 . enter(70/100) = 0.co.00 Min. Undervoltage 2 Setup The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.NT http://www.01 sec >Time Delay : 5. V(xVT): 0. V(xVT) [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage) Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0. V(xVT): 0.70 Default 5. 3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are under the pickup voltage level. and an alarm is required whenever the voltage goes below 70V.entecene. 2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage values are under the pickup voltage level.10 Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P.70 Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.10 Step 0. Used to prevent the undervoltage 1 element for voltage below this level.70 Step 0.00 ~ 600.00 ~ 1.10 Default 1P Step ~ >Pickup Type: 1P Select the type of phase required for operation.00 ~ 1.70 × VT for the pickup.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT) [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0. 3P Time Delay : 5.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage) Pickup(xVT): 0. 1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value is under the pickup voltage level.70 Time Delay : 5.00 Set the definite time delay.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0. For example. Setting to 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 Default 0.01 >Min.01 >Pickup(xVT): 0.00 Step 0. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Min. if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V.

it trips and alarms.co.00 ~ 1.entecene. and an alarm is required whenever the voltage exceeds 120 V.25 xVT Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 1. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Function [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF. To increase security. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT) [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Pickup(xVT): 1. the overvoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. if the secondary nominal voltage is 100 V. For example.15. The overvoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase. If function = Trip & AR. all overvoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. the feature is operational.20 Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. Alternate settings . Overvoltage (59) Two overvoltage elements are provided for trip.20 Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8) [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF. enter 120 / 100 = 1. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition. 172 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . TRIP. The overvoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary.20 Step 0.20 for the pickup. Overvoltage 1 Setup The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. If function = Trip. the feature is operational. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls. the feature is not operational. alarm and control when the voltage rises above a specified voltage for a specified time. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Pickup(xVT): 1.01 >Pickup(xVT): 1.kr 7. any two phase and three phase.20 If function = OFF.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 173 .00 Set the definite time delay.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 1.00 Step 0.entecene. 1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value is over the pickup voltage level. 3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are over the pickup voltage level.00 Default 1P Step ~ >Pickup Type: 1P Select the type of phase required for operation.20 Default 5.01 sec >Time Delay : 5. 2P.00 ~ 600. 2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage values are over the pickup voltage level. 3P Pickup(xVT): 1. Overvoltage 2 Setup The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.20 Time Delay : 5.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.

00 If function = OFF. the feature is operational. Alternate settings. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition.NT http://www. The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.co. the feature is operational.16.entecene. alarm and control when the frequency drops below a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay. Explanation for each element is below. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Function [FREQUENCY] Range OFF.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs. The underfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary. Overfrequency (81O) Overfrequency element is provided for trip. The overfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary. The overfrequency minimum voltage and overfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the overfrequency is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods. TR&AR >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Under Pu(Hz): 55. Frequency Setup The underfrequency and overfrequency element should be enabled to the following settings. Frequency(81) EVRC2A has underfrequency and overfrequency elements to detect unusual frequency in power system.kr 7. 174 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . If function = Trip. TRIP. If function = Trip & AR. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs. Underfrequency (81U) Underfrequency element is provided for trip. it trips and alarms. the feature is not operational. alarm and control when the frequency rises above a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay. Alternate settings.

For example.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www. if the system frequency is 60㎐.00 sec Under TD: 2. and load shedding is required at 55.00 Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Pickup(Hz) [[FREQUENCY] Range 50.01 sec >Under TD: 2. enter 65.01 Hz >Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 for this setting.00 ~ 60.00 Step 0. and load shedding is required at 65. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 Default 2.00 Over Pu(Hz): 65.00 Default 6.co. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Pickup(Hz) [[FREQUENCY] Range 40.00 Default 55.00 Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 175 . PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Time Delay [FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Time Delay [FREQUENCY] Range 0.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Relays(0-8) [FREQUENCY] Range OFF.01 Hz >Over Pu(Hz): 65.00 ~ 70.00 Step 0.00 Hz Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 ~ 600.00 Hz Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 45.00 Step 0.00 Step 0.00 Under TD: 2. For example.00 Set the definite time delay for Overfrequency.00 sec Relays(0-8): OFF Under Pu(Hz): 55.00㎐.01 sec >Over TD: 6. enter 55.00 ~ 600.00㎐.00 Set the definite time delay for underfrequency.00 for this setting. if the system frequency is 60㎐.entecene.

176 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .25 >Over TD: 6. I(A) [FREQUENCY] Range 10 ~ 1600A >Over TD: 6.00 >Min. V(xVT): 0.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min.00 ~ 1. V(xVT): 0. V(xVT) [FREQUENCY] Range 0. I(A): 10 Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the frequency element to operate.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. I(A): 10 Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the frequency element to Operate.00 >Min.0 sec >Min. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL Func’ [FREQUENCY] Range OFF.0 Enable or disable “CLOSE” function when the frequency becomes normal. ON >Min.0 ~ 6000. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL TD [FREQUENCY] Range 0.01 >NFCL Func’: OFF Default 60. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. I(A): 0.01 >Min. I(A): 10 >NFCL Func’: OFF Default OFF Step ~ >NFCL TD: 60.0 Set the time delay before “CLOSE” operation.10 Default 10 Step 1A >Min.10 Step 0.co.NT http://www.10 Default 0.1 >NFCL TD: 60.0 Step 0.entecene.

This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose operation of Down-lines. 3) To coordinate the protection characteristics.NT http://www.17.1.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser. If function = OFF. not to those of Down-line Reclosers. The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature. 1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series. the feature is not operational.entecene.O Priority: GND Default OFF Step ~ F/I Reset: AUTO Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are connected in series. 2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.17. Sequence Coordination When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems. the feature is operational. ON >Seq’ Coordi’: OFF L. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi' [ OTHER ELEMENT ] Range OFF. The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.kr 7. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 177 . Sequence Coordination feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault current. 4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Down-line Reclosers.co. If function = ON. Other Element 7. EVRC2A contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault.

if Sequence Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution systems.O Priority: GND Default GND Step ~ F/I Reset: AUTO Lockout priority PHA : Phase prior GND : Ground prior 178 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co. Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at the last sequence of the full sequence. Other Element PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / L. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP. Increase Trip Counter without Trip Starting Reset Time Counter Close Back Up EVR 1 Open Close Down line EVR 2 Lockout Status Open Time Faulted Figure 7-11.2. During the count at the Back-up Recloser.kr As shown in “Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination function cannot be operated.17. GND Seq’ Coordi’: OFF >L. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram 7. the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements.O Priority [OTHER ELEMENT] Range PHA.entecene. if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line Recloser.NT http://www. the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

00 Step 0.NT http://www.O Priority: GND Default AUTO Step ~ >F/I Reset: AUTO Faulted Indicator reset method AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes normal.01 sec >D/T M-Close: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.O Priority: GND F/I Reset: AUTO Default 0.co. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close [OTHER ELEMENT] Range 0.00 Time delay for manual close ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 179 .00 sec L. MANUAL Seq’ Coordi’: OFF L. MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.00 ~ 600.kr PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset [OTHER ELEMENT] Range AUTO.entecene.

β.entecene. ESB curves.co.112 and IEC 255-3. IEC curves. Time Overcurrent Curves The EVRC2A is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves. user-defined curves and all 37 non standard recloser curves are available. otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸. γ Characteristic constant M Multiples of pickup current Rt Reset characteristic constant NOTE ) 1) “Time Dial” and “Time Adder” settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively.18. ESB curves.NT http://www. IEC curves. 180 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . A Configuration setting determines whether elements set to use ANSI/IEEE curves. The operation times and reset times are defined as follows : ANSI/IEEE Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) IEC Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA) ESB Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) USER-DEFINED Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2)) Table 7-2. user-defined curves reset instantaneously. 2) “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 7. Curve Factor TD Time dial TA Time adder α. The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37. or corresponding with electromechanical.

4 : USER CURVE 2 ~ 4.0000 ~ 150.0000 Step 0.9999 Factor a: 59.entecene.5000 Step 0.8000 Default 59.0001 >Factor rt: 59.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.8000 User defined curve factor γ PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt [USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0001 Factor r: 1.NT http://www.0000 ~ 150.5000 Factor b: 2.8000 User defined curve factor β PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r [USER CURVE 1] Range 0.8000 User defined curve factor α PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b [USER CURVE 1] Range 0.9999 Factor b: 2.9999 Factor a: 59.0000 Default 2. the same as USER CURVE 1 above ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 181 .0000 ~ 150.0000 Default 59.0000 Default 1. 3.5000 User defined curve factor rt 2) USER CURVE 2.kr Related Setting Menu 1) USER CURVE 1 PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a [USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 Factor r: 1.co.0000 ~ 150.8000 Step 0.0001 Factor r: 1.5000 Step 0.0001 >Factor r: 1.5000 Factor b: 2.5000 >Factor b: 2.9999 >Factor a: 59.

NT http://www.000 Long Time Inverse 135.020 0.0000 0.0107 0.1000 2.5000 2.985 Extremely Inverse 5.700 Very Inverse 13.000 0.95 0.5000 User2 39.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.0 135.0200 0. IEC Curves α β γ Rt Standard Inverse 0.000 1.co.1400 0.0000 1.095 3.000 0.0345 5.0 13.0 80.500 1.00 Short Time Inverse 0. ANSI/IEEE Curves α β γ Rt Moderately Inverse 0.992 Table 7-4.500 Table 7-5.356 Short Time Very Inverse 1.985 2.9925 2.000 0.94 1.9100 2.000 0.0400 0.042 9.0231 1.000 0.9500 39.011 0.9500 Very Inverse 3.56e-3 0.6700 182 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .1000 User4 5.0 0.6700 2.kr Standard Curve Coefficients Table 7-3.02 0.985 1.000 Very Inverse 3.95 0.000 0. ESB Curves α β γ Rt Standard Inverse 0.0500 0.1084 3.9500 2.500 Extremely Inverse 80.02 1.4336 15.entecene.18 5.0475 1.0700 Normally Inverse 5. User Defined Curves α β γ Rt User1 59.0000 0.3450 59.8500 User3 59.0352 5.9100 Short Time Inverse 3.000 0.95e-2 0.94 Table 7-6.8500 2.8000 59.000 2.0000 0.0 9.985 Long Time Very Inverse 15.

co.0 1. Non Standard Curves McGraw-Edison recloser curves Phase Ground Old New Old New A 101 1 102 B 117 2 135 C 133 3 140 D 116 4 106 E 132 5 114 F 163 6 136 H 122 7 152 J 164 8 113 KP 162 8* 111 L 107 9 131 M 118 11 141 N 104 13 142 P 115 14 119 R 105 15 112 T 161 16 139 V 137 17 103 W 138 18 151 Y 120 KG 165 Z 134 . 10.NT http://www.entecene.0 .0 10.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr Table 7-7. - ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 183 . 1.0 Table 7-8.0 Definite Time 10sec 0.0 . Definite Time Curves α β γ Rt Definite Time 1sec 0.

3 0.00 1 1 0.2 0.2 1.00 0.00 7.09 0.03 0.01 0.5 3.00 2 2 11.07 0.7 0.08 0.4 0.co.7 4.3 0.00 13.6 0.06 0.02 0.06 0.entecene.05 0.07 0.02 0.00 0.1 0.00 TIME(SECONDS) 9.00 0.03 0.NT http://www.08 0.kr 1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 15.05 0.1 0. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves 184 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .8 5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.9 0.4 2.04 0.5 0.09 0.04 0.8 0.05 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 6k 8k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-12.9 0.6 0.00 0.00 0.

00 2 9.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 15.06 0.00 0.NT http://www.03 0.05 0. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 185 .02 0.07 0.3 0.00 1 1 0.05 0.1 0.04 0.co.09 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.7 0.1 0.01 0.00 0.06 0.8 0.00 0.08 0.04 0.00 0.02 0.6 0.00 0.09 0.00 2 11.07 0.4 2.5 0.08 0.4 0.00 TIME(SECONDS) 7.03 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 1.9 5.6 3.kr 2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.9 0.entecene.5 0.00 13.50 0.7 4.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-13.

5 5.6 0.7 0.01 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-14.03 0.05 0.2 2.04 0.02 0.00 13.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.3 0.08 0.1 1.04 0.00 0.8 0.00 1 11.00 0.09 0.07 0.9 9.50 0.06 0.00 1 0.NT http://www.3 3.08 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 15.7 7.4 0.03 0.8 0.00 0.06 0.entecene.9 0.6 0.09 0.4 4.2 0. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves 186 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.00 0.kr 3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ANSI VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.1 0.5 0.05 0.

8 0.01 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.00 0.2 4.09 0.02 0.00 0.6 0.09 0.6 15.05 0.5 11.00 0.07 0.06 0.4 9.3 7.00 0.5 13.7 0.co.08 2.NT http://www. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 187 .9 0.00 0.kr 4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 60 60 : ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE 50 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.04 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-15.1 0.1 0.8 0.entecene.07 0.00 0.03 0.04 1.00 0.08 0.2 5.9 0.00 3.06 0.3 0.05 0.7 0.00 0.02 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.50 0.03 0.00 0.4 0.

50 0.8 0.2 3.3 4.09 0.7 0.7 11.2 2.03 0.9 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.07 1.01 0.4 0.00 0.06 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.3 0.1 0.kr 5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 6k 7k 8k 9k 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.00 0.05 0.03 0. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves 188 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .05 0.04 0.04 0.02 0.6 9.00 0.NT http://www.00 0.co.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 15.00 0.00 1 0.02 0.8 0.06 0.entecene.5 7.1 0.08 0.6 0.01 1k 3k 4k 5k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 2k 6k 7k 8k 9k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-16.00 0.9 13.08 0.4 5.09 0.5 0.

05 0.6 11.03 0.6 13.co.05 1.00 0.entecene.2 3.2 4.8 0.8 0.4 7.50 0.00 0.00 0.1 2.04 0.NT http://www.03 0.9 0.9 0.kr 6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.00 0.06 0.3 5.04 0.7 15.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.00 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.7 0.08 0.01 0.4 0.1 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-17.09 0.09 0.3 0.00 0.5 0.00 0.02 0.5 9.06 0. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 189 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.07 0.02 0.

1 0.03 0.5 0.8 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.1 0.2 0.03 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 TIME(SECONDS) 0.08 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-18.7 0.07 0.07 0.9 0.co.09 0.1 0.4 0.05 0.2 0.06 0.6 0.7 0.5 1 0.4 0.06 0.kr 7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : IEC STANDARD INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.08 0.3 0. IEC Standard Inverse Curves 190 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .01 0.NT http://www.05 0.8 0.04 0.05 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene.02 0.02 0.04 0.4 0.6 0.9 0.2 0.6 1 0.7 0.8 0.09 0.

04 0.1 0.05 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.8 0.08 0.4 0.9 0.6 0.07 0.9 0.09 0.02 0.06 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.8 0. IEC Very Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 191 .6 0.08 0.5 0.NT http://www.04 0.07 0.5 1.05 0.00 0.06 0.co.5 0.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.3 0.02 0.7 0.05 0.09 0.6 0.7 0.01 4k 6k 7k 9k 1k 2k 3k 5k 8k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-19.2 0.1 0.4 0.03 0.kr 8) IEC Very Inverse Curves 100 200 300 500 600 700 800 400 900 10k 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.1 0.8 0.2 0.2 0.01 0.03 0.4 0.

06 0.03 0.kr 9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.2 0.04 0.08 0.4 0.5 0.07 0.8 0.3 0.05 0.9 0.3 0.5 0.01 0.1 0.7 0.entecene.04 0. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves 192 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .3 0.6 0.7 0.1 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.6 0.5 0.co.2 0.9 0.09 0.NT http://www.6 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-20.05 0.09 0.06 0.1 0.00 0.05 0.08 1.2 0.07 0.4 0.8 0.7 0.8 0.03 0.4 0.02 0.02 0.

7 0.06 0.6 0.07 0. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 193 .01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-21.6 0.9 0.04 0.09 0.03 0.05 0.2 0.09 0.05 0.4 0. 6 0.06 0.7 0.02 0.8 0.07 0.08 0. 3 1 1 0.2 0.8 3 0.1 0.kr 10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.05 0.3 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1.1 0.01 0. 4 TIME(SECONDS) 0.08 0. 5 2 2 0.entecene.co.00 4 4 0.04 0. 7 3 0.2 0.02 0.4 0.03 0.9 0.NT http://www.8 0.

06 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.5 0.2 0.01 4k 200 400 500 600 700 1k 2k 3k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 100 300 800 900 PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-22.6 0.4 0.6 0.entecene.7 0.1 0.04 0.3 0.NT http://www.1 0.05 0.co.9 0.07 0.05 0.8 0.07 0.03 0.09 0.kr 11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves 100 300 200 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 8k 9k 2k 4k 5k 6k 7k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.3 0.2 0.02 0.8 0. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves 194 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .06 0.4 1.02 0.3 0.05 0.03 0.08 0.00 0.7 0.08 0.1 0.6 0.5 0.01 0.8 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.9 0.2 0.5 0.09 0.4 0.04 0.7 0.

07 0.00 0.4 2.2 1.9 0.06 0.NT http://www.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-23.6 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 15.00 2 9.04 0.03 0.kr 12) ESB Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ESB INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.02 0.7 0.3 0.01 0.00 1 0.02 0.09 0.4 0.00 TIME(SECONDS) 7.2 0.9 0.04 0.8 0.03 0.5 0.00 2 11.00 0.3 0.07 0.50 0.08 0.08 0.05 0.entecene.5 0.00 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. ESB Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 195 .6 3.09 0.06 0.1 0.05 0.8 4.00 1 5.1 0.co.00 3 13.7 0.00 0.

7 0.6 0.3 2.kr 13) ESB Very Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ESB VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% 0.06 0.00 0.9 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1 0.00 0.NT http://www.1 0.00 0.00 0.5 0.2 1.00 11.4 3.00 1 0.05 0.07 0.9 0.03 0.02 0.06 0.8 7.09 0.05 0.09 0.entecene.08 0.6 5.4 0. ESB Very Inverse Curves 196 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .00 TIME(SECONDS) 13.07 0.5 4.3 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.08 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 15.00 0.7 0.00 0.02 0.8 0.co.2 0.01 0.04 0.00 1 9.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-24.

02 0.9 0.00 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.kr 14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.3 0.50 0.04 0.00 5 4 9.00 5 11.00 4 3 7. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 197 .7 0.06 0.8 0.07 0.2 0.08 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.00 3 5.03 0.09 0.08 0.00 7 6 6 13.09 0.07 0.00 2 2 4.4 0.1 0.04 0.3 0.6 0.co.2 0.06 0.00 0.00 TIME(SECONDS) 3.5 1.00 1 1 0.03 0.7 0.05 0.entecene.9 2.NT http://www.1 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 15.4 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-25.

01 4k 200 400 500 600 700 1k 2k 3k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 100 300 800 900 PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-26.02 0.4 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.06 0.2 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.5 0.co.07 0.1 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.2 0.08 0.01 0.8 0.3 0.1 0. D2) 100 300 200 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 8k 9k 2k 4k 5k 6k 7k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : D1.04 0. D2) 198 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .8 0.5 0.09 0.03 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 D2 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 D1 1 0.kr 15) Definite Time Curves (D1.4 0.07 0.05 0. Definite Time Curves (D1.9 0.09 0.entecene.7 0.08 0.05 0.NT http://www.7 0. D2 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.02 0.

co. E) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 2k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : A.entecene.2 0.06 D E 0.NT http://www. B.07 0.4 0.02 0.7 0.04 0.9 0.3 0.02 0.kr 16) Non Standard Curves (A. C. E 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.03 0. D.7 0. B.1 0.03 0. D.6 0.08 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-27. E) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 199 .09 0.05 A 0. Non Standard Curves (A.4 0. D.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.04 0.06 0.07 B 0.5 0. C.3 0. C.1 0. B.01 0.08 0.6 0.5 0.8 0.2 0.05 0.09 C 0.9 0.8 0.

L.2 0. L.09 L 0.09 0.8 0.4 0. M.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.4 0.1 0. N 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0. Non Standard Curves (KP.02 0.entecene. L.01 0.5 0.07 N 0. M. N) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 8k 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 9k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : KP.6 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.3 0.05 0.NT http://www.04 0.7 0.03 0.08 0.kr 17) Non Standard Curves (KP.3 0.04 0.01 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-28.9 0.06 0.2 KP 0.08 M 0. M.06 0.05 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.1 0.co.5 0.03 0. N) 200 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .8 0.07 0.02 0.

2 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.1 T 0. Non Standard Curves (P.07 0.9 0. T.NT http://www.entecene.01 0.5 0.7 V 0.9 0. T.co. R.8 0. T.08 0. V) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 8k 9k 2k 4k 5k 6k 7k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : P.3 0.03 0.kr 18) Non Standard Curves (P.1 0.4 0. R. V) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 201 .5 0.05 0.4 0.07 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.09 0.05 P 0.7 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.09 0.04 0.08 0.01 2k 4k 5k 6k 7k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1k 3k 8k 9k 10k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-29.04 0.02 0. V 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.6 0.06 R 0. R.06 0.02 0.6 0.03 0.

Y.9 0.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0.kr 19) Non Standard Curves (W.5 Z 0.8 0.01 0.1 0.co.07 0.4 0.3 W 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Non Standard Curves (W.8 0.NT http://www.07 0.2 Y 0.09 0. Z 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.7 0.2 0. Y.02 0.08 0.6 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.03 0.01 4k 200 400 500 600 700 1k 2k 3k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 100 300 800 900 PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-30.06 0.5 0.04 0.6 0.4 0.entecene.3 0. Y. Z) 100 300 200 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 3k 8k 9k 2k 4k 5k 6k 7k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : W.7 0.1 0.9 0.08 0. Z) 202 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .09 0.06 0.05 0.

09 0. 3.2 0. 2.3 0. 4.5 0.05 0.09 0.06 0.6 2 0.7 0.8 0.01 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 7k 9k 10k 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 6k 8k PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT Figure 7-31. 2.4 0.1 0.04 0.7 0.kr 20) Non Standard Curves (1.08 0.1 0.6 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.5 0. 3.01 SECONDS 40 30 30 20 20 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 TIME(SECONDS) 1 1 0. 4.9 0.06 1 0.02 0.entecene. 5 60 50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50 40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.03 0.02 0.NT http://www.4 0.8 0. 3.01 0. 5) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 10k 1k 2k 3k 4k 6k 7k 8k 9k 5k 100 100 90 90 80 80 70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70 60 : 1. 5) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 203 .9 3 0.co.07 0. 4.07 4 0.04 0.03 0.3 0. 2.08 0. Non Standard Curves (1.05 0.2 5 0.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

21) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

100

200

300

500

600
700
800
400

900

10k
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 60
: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50

40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 7 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5

4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2
8

0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 8* 0.05
6
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
6k
7k

10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

8k
9k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

204 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOS
SER CONTR
ROL EVRC2A
A-N6,NT http
p://www.enttecene.co.krr

22) Non
N Standardd Curves (11,, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

Figure 7-333. Non Standdard Curvess (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 118)

ENHA
ANCED TEC
CHNOLOGY
Y 205

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

23) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

10k
1k

3k

4k

5k

6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : F, H, J, KG 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50

40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40

30 30

20 20

10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2
TIME(SECONDS)

1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

F J
0.1 KG 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
H
0.04 0.04

0.03 0.03

0.02 0.02

0.01 0.01
1k

2k

3k

4k

5k

7k

9k
10k
100

200

300

400

500

600
700
800
900

6k

8k

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

206 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.19. Loss of Phase - Option
EVRC2A has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when
loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate
settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of EVRC2A.
If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or
two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker
determines Loss of Phase.

The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Function
[LOSS OF PHASE] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(xVT): 0.30
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Relays(0-8)
[LOSS OF PHASE] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Pickup(xVT): 0.30

Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup(xVT)
[LOSS OF PHASE] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0.30 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 ×
VT for the pickup.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay
[LOSS OF PHASE] Range 0.10 ~ 100.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default 20.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 20.00

The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 207

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

8. MONITORING
EVRC2A has Monitoring function for following items and also has functions for user to output
Alarm signal or Trip signal.

y DEMAND
y SYNCHRO CHECK
y TRIP COUNTER
y RECLOSER WEAR
y BATTERY TEST
y FAULT LOCATOR
y GAS LOW LOCK – Option
y EXT’ TRIP & LOCK – Option
y LIVE LOAD BLOCK – Option

8.1. Demand
8.1.1. Description
EVRC2A is programmed to monitor following items to be operated as user sets.
y Phase Current demand value
y Ground current demand value
y Negative sequence current demand value

8.1.2. Related Setting Menu
1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Demand elements were picked up.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Function
[DEMAND] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Type: THM
OFF : OFF Monitoring
TRIP : Generates Trip signal
TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal

208 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Alarm Output Relay Setting
Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Relays(0-8)
[DEMAND] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Type: THM
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000 : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.

3) Demand Method Setting
Setting for Demand calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Type
[DEMAND] Range THM, ROL
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default THM Step ~
>Type: THM
THM : Calculated by Thermal Exponential demand.
ROL : Calculated Rolling demand.

4) Time constant Setting
Setting for 90% Response time in Thermal calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Time Constant(m)
[DEMAND] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Relays(0-8): OFF
Type: THM Default 5 Step ~
>Time Constant(m): 5
Enter the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the
actual value.

5) Phase demand pickup current setting
Setting for Phase demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHA PU(A)
[DEMAND] Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Type: THM
Time Constant(m): 5 Default 600A Step 1A
>PHA PU(A): 600

Set Phase demand pickup current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 209

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 6) Ground demand pickup current Setting Setting for Ground demand pickup current.entecene.NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / NEQ PU(A) [DEMAND] Range OFF. 210 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . 7) Negative sequence demand pickup current Setting Setting for Negative sequence demand pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / GND PU(A) [DEMAND] Range OFF. 10 ~ 1600A PHA PU(A): 600 GND PU(A): 300 Default 600A Step 1A >NEQ PU(A): 600 Set Negative sequence demand pickup current. 10 ~ 1600A Time Constant(m): 5 PHA PU(A): 600 Default 300A Step 1A >GND PU(A): 300 Set Ground demand pickup current.co.

the feature is not operational. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.50 Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check. If function = ALARM.kr 8. If EVRC2A is the type of VD.Max(xVT): 0.00 ~ 1.Max(xVT): 0.V.50 If function = OFF.01 >D. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 211 .V.25 Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function [SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF.co. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Relays(0-8) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF. the feature is operational. for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb.V. phase angle position. Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this level. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 D. on load side in recloser. If this feature is enabled. ALARM >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ D.50 Step 0. Vs or Vt.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the synchronism check can allow for local/remote close.Max(xVT): 0. The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.NT http://www.50 Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an Alarm. Synchronism Check (25) EVRC2A provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude.entecene. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral voltage Vr. When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized.Max(xVT) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0. and frequency. the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load side(VR phase) in recloser. the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close with the exception of automatic reclose for fault.V.2.

A.V. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.V.10 Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages.00 ~ 1.V.NT http://www.10 Default 15 Step 1 deg >M.Min(xVT): 0.01 >M.V.00 Hz M.D(Hz): 2.00 Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages.D(Deg): 15 Default 2.D(Deg) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0 ~ 100 deg L.Max(xVT): 0.D(V) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.D(Deg): 15 Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages.85 Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check.entecene. An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.50 Default 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase [SYNCHROCHECK] Range R(AB).D(V): 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz): 2.25 Relays(0-8): OFF D.V.10 M.10 Step 0. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.A.Max(xVT): 0.D(Hz) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 Step 0. S(CB).D(V): 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.85 Default 0.V.F.kr PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.25 D.D(Deg): 15 M. 212 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . T(AC) M.V.01 >L.D(V): 0.F.Min(xVT): 0.50 L.85 M.85 Step 0.A.co.V.Min(xVT): 0.A.00 ~ 1.00 ~ 5.01 Hz >M. Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this level.V.00 Default R(AB) Step ~ >Sync Phase: R(AB) Select the synchronism check phase on load side.Min(xVT) [SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.

3.FAULT : 00000 User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/MAINTENANCE/COUNTERS” 3.1.3.3.entecene.TRIP : 00000 2. 3.2. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Relays(0-8) [TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF. Trip Counter 8. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 213 .NT http://www. 0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected. 1234 : Operate output signal through 1. y Trip : Records trip operation count y Fault : Records Fault count y System Restart : Records system restart count MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS [ COUNTER ] 1.kr 8. 4 Output Relay. Trip Counter Explanation EVRC2A records counter related with System operation.RESTART: 00011 8. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Function [TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF. 2. Related Setting Menu 1) Function Setting Select for system to operate when Trip Counter reaches Limit value set by user.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. 0 ~ 8 Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1 Limit: 10000 Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal. Especially Trip Counter is operated depending on Monitoring function set by user. ALARM >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~ Limit: 10000 OFF : OFF Monitoring ALARM : Generate Alarm signal 2) Alarm Output Relay Setting Select Relay output for alarm.

kr 3) Limit value Setting Setting for Trip Counter Monitor value. 214 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . 5) Stored Value Clear Select “7.NT http://www. 4) Clear value Setting Use to synchronize EVRC2A counter with Recloser Counter. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Limit [TRIP COUNTER] Range 1 ~ 20000 Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Default 10000 Step 1 >Limit: 10000 Select for system to operate when Trip Counter limit value was picked up.co.entecene.Counter” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the Trip Counter.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Counter set [TRIP COUNTER] Range 0 ~ 10000 Relays(0-8): OFF Limit: 10000 Default 0 Step 1 >Counter set: 0 Enters a value for Trip Counter Clear.

Phase B Wear : Shows phase B contact life. NOTE : The rated voltage determines the Recloser type.0 Default Note Step ~ >Rated Volt(kV): 15 Select rated voltage.70 2.co. 3) Rated Voltage Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Rated Volt(kV) [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 15.kr 8. 2) Pickup Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Pickup(%) [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.CONTACT C : 98.70 “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR” 3.1 % Rated Volt(kV): 15 Enter Pickup value of contact life. Manages the contact life calculated from fault current size when faults interrupted. Recloser Wear Explanation Maintenance of contact life of Recloser. Related setting menu 1) Function Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Function [RECLOSER WEAR] Range OFF.entecene.4. ALARM >Function: ALARM Pickup(%): 20.4. 8. 27.1. 38 ㎸ Function: ALARM Pickup(%): 20.0 Step 0. Phase C Wear : Shows phase C contact life.NT http://www.70 Phase A Wear : Shows phase A contact life.CONTACT A : 98. The initial value is 100% MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR [WEAR MONITOR (%)] User can confirm in 1. Recloser Wear 8.2.0 % Function: ALARM >Pickup(%): 20. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 215 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.0 Default 20.4.0 Default ALARM Step ~ Rated Volt(kV): 15 Select for system to operate when Recloser wear elements were picked up.CONTACT B : 98.

5) Maximum Rated Interruption Number Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / No.co.0 Enter a value of Phase C ’s contact wear.kr 4) Interrupter capacity setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Interrupt(kA) [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 5.0 Enter a value of Phase A ’s contact wear.00 Step 0.0 kA Pickup(%): 20. Max I [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 1 ~ 999 Rated Volt(kV): 15 Interrupt(kA): 12.0 Default 100.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 ~ 50.01 % >C Wear Set: 100. Max I: 100 Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.0 Enter a value of Phase B ’s contact wear.00 ~ 100.01 % >C Wear Set: 100.00 % >A Wear Set: 100. 216 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene.01 % >C Wear Set: 100.5 Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.NT http://www. 6) Clear value Setting Use to synchronize EVRC2A contact wear with Recloser contact wear.00 ~ 100.00 % >A Wear Set: 100.00 Step 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / C Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.5 Default 100 Step 1 >No.0 Default 100.00 % >A Wear Set: 100. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / A Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.1 kA >Interrupt(kA): 12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 Rated Volt(kV): 15 Default 16 Step 0.0 Default 100. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / B Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 Step 0.

co. C Wear” from LCD menu. Battery Test PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / BT Time(day) [BATTERY TEST] Range 0(OFF).NT http://www. B. 8. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 217 . WEAR MONITOR” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear value.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 7) Stored value Clear Select “8.5.entecene. 1 ~ 7 day >BT Time(day): OFF Default OFF Step 1 day Select the period for automatically checking the battery status. Insert the value set in “PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WEAR / A.

Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow. the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful. and then fault type(phase to ground. phase to phase. the fault distance can be easily achieved. This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.6. three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations.co. The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder. refer to “12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage. 218 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Fault Locator The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault.entecene. For more details. and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance. the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles. Waveform Capture”. In calculating. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied. If the line impedance per unit and total length were known. during a reclose sequence.). (phase to phase to ground). Faulted distribution system circuit” for example. mZ (1-m)Z IA IF L O VA RF A D Figure 8-1. In case of closing.1. but source impedance is not required. For more accurate calculation.NT http://www. and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles. Faulted distribution system circuit The calculated “Fault Location” can be checked on the “FAULT CYCLE” event menu. Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-1.kr 8.

0 Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence impedance.1 ~ 6000.0 Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Resistive [FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 km Z1(RES) : 10. in actual ohms.0 Step 0.1 ~ 99.co.0 Z0(RES) : 10.0 Default 50.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Inductive [FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Resistive [FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0. in actual ohms.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.0 Z1(IND) : 10.0 Z1(IND) : 10.0 Default 10. the feature is not operational.kr The fault locator settings are as follows : PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Function [FAULT LOCATOR] Range OFF.0 Function : OFF Length(km) : 50. If function = ON.0 Z1(RES) : 10.entecene.0 If function = OFF.0 Step 0.0 Step 0.0 Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance.0 Default 10.0 Default 10. the feature is operational. in actual ohms.1 ~ 6000.NT http://www. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Feeder Length [FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Inductive [FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 >Z0(IND) : 10. in actual ohms. ON >Function : OFF Length(km) : 50.1 ~ 6000.1 >Z0(RES) : 10.0 Step 0.9 km Function : OFF >Length(km) : 50.1 >Z1(IND) : 10.0 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence impedance.1 >Z1(RES) : 10.0 Length(km) : 50 Z1(RES) : 10. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 219 .0 Default OFF Step ~ Z1(RES) : 10.0 Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence impedance.1 ~ 6000.

If function = DISABLE. EVRC2A can’t be opened or closed on the gas pressure low status (below 0.8. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / USE Inputport [EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range 1~8 >Function: DISABLE >USE Inputport: 1 Default 1 Step 1 >Reset Method: LOCAL Set the port to receive the signal from SCADA. if “1” is set. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / Function [EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range DISABLE. EXT’ Trip & Lock . Gas Low Lock .co. As example.Option This function can make EVRC2A opened and then close lock when the corresponding signal sent from SCADA is received. this function is activated or not by the signal value on IN01 port. NOTE : This function is applies only to Gas Type Recloser.Option PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / GAS LOW LOCK / Function [GAS LOW LOCK] Range DISABLE.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1bar).ENABLE >Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~ If function = ENABLE.entecene. 8.7.NT http://www.ENABLE >Function: DISABLE >USE Inputport: 1 Default DISABLE Step ~ >Reset Method: LOCAL If function = ENABLE. the function is not activated even if the signal is received. EVRC2A can be opened or closed even if it is on the gas pressure low status.kr 8. 220 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . EVRC2A will be open and then close locked when the signal from SCADA is received. If function = DISABLE. And EVRC2A can be reset from close lock status by “FI Reset” command.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock \ Reset Method
[EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range 0:LOCAL,1:LO&RE
>Function: DISABLE
>USE Inputport: 1 Default LOCAL Step ~
>Reset Method: LOCAL
LOCAL : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel, the close lock is
released.
LO&RE : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel or remote “FI
Reset” command, the close lock is released.

8.9. Live Load Block – Option
When closed, EVRC2A provides the Close Block function operated by whether or not there is
voltage live line on the load side.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Function
[Live Load Blocking] Range OFF, RECLO, CLOSE, BOTH
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default OFF Step ~
>Time Delay: 1.00
If function = OFF, the function is not operational.
If function = RECLOSE, the function is operated when reclosed after
fault occurrence.
If function = CLOSE, the function is operated when manually closed
locally or remotely.
If function = BOTH, the function is operated when reclosed or
manually closed.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Pickup(xVT)
[Live Load Blocking] Range 0.10 ~ 0.90
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default 0.30 Step 0.01
>Time Delay: 1.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage in
load side. As example, if secondary voltage of load side is 100V and a
user wants that the close lock is operated when the voltage of load side
is over 30V, set 0.3090.30x100V = 30V)

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Time Delay
[Live Load Blocking] Range 0.00~600.00sec
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default 1.00sec Step 0.01
>Time Delay: 1.00
At open, if the voltage on load side is over the Pickup setting and
maintained for this setting time, the close block is operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 221

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

9. STATUS
This menu shows the current status of EVRC2A like below
y OPTO INPUTS
y RELAY OUTPUTS
y CLOCK
y CONTROL TYPE

9.1. OPTO Inputs
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS” to see external input port status..
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[OPTO INPUTS] Display 8 input port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Input 1: OPEN
Input 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the input signal status.
Input 3: OPEN
Input 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
Input 5: OPEN
Input 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Input 7: OPEN
Input 8: CLOSE
Door St: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all input port statuses

9.2. Relay Outputs
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RELAY OUTPUTS” to see external output port status.
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[RELAY OUTPUTS] Display 8 output port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Output 1: OPEN
Output 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the output signal status.
Output 3: OPEN
Output 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Output is de-asserted,
Output 5: OPEN
Output 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Output is asserted.
Output 7: OPEN
Output 8: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all output port statuses

222 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.3. Clock
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CLOCK” to see current time.

The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.

Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A

STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]

2009/11/05 21:02:38

From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A

STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]
ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time.
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
G2009/01/01 00:00:00 ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time.

[CURRENT TIME]

L ⓐ
G ⓑ

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 223

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.4. Control Type
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CONTROL TYPE” to see EVRC2A information.
STATUS / CONTROL TYPE
Preset EVRC2A in information is displayed.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx- EVRC2A information screen consists of 2 screens, first screen shows
5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXX
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060 firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is
changed by [▲] [▼] button.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx-
5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXⓐ
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060 NOTE
The letter located at `ⓐ’ in the “CONTROL TYPE” screen on the
side indicates whether ZCT is installed or not.

[CONTROL TYPE]
If the letter located at `ⓐ’ is `X’ then it is a product that was

MPU: 7.00 DSP: 1.00
dispatched without ZCT installed(normal mode) while, if the
CPU: 2.00
letter located at `ⓐ’ is `S’ then it is a product that was dispatched
with ZCT installed(special option) as per user’s request.
Depending on whether the product was dispatched with ZCT
installed or not, the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the “PICKUP
CURRENT” menu and the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the
“CLPU-TYPE1” menu will be different.

224 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

10. METERING
The following values are contained in the metering elements of EVRC2A.
y Current
y Voltage(Source Side, Load Side)
y Frequency
y Synchronism Voltage
y Power
y Energy
y Demand
y System
y Harmonics
y Unbalance

NOTE : Unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 225

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1. Metering Elements
10.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering.
IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
ISG : Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
I2 : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS current (A)

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”
MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT

[LINE CURRENT(A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]
A: 0 B: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
C: 0 G: 0 [PHASE B CURRENT] [GROUND CURRENT]
SG: 0 I2: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag

[ZERO SEQ CURRENT] [POS SEQ CURRENT] [SENSTV CURRENT]
0A 0.0 Lag 0A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
[NEQ SEQ CURRENT]
0A 0.0 Lag

Display measured values of current and current phase per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check
metering information of current.

226 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.2. Voltage(Souce Side, Load Side)
The following values are contained in the voltage metering.
A-N : Displays the measured A-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
B-N : Displays the measured B-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
C-N : Displays the measured C-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
A-B : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
B-C : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
C-A : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
AVERAGE PHASE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS phase voltage(㎸)
AVERAGE LINE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS line voltage(㎸)
POS SEQ : Displays the calculated positive sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
NEG SEQ : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
ZERO SEQ : Displays the calculated zero sequence RMS voltage and phasor (㎸, Lag)

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE”
MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE

[VOLTAGE (kV)] [AVERAGE PHASE] [PHASE A-N VOLTAGE]
AN: 0.00 AB: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
BN: 0.00 BC: 0.00 [AVERAGE LINE] [PHASE B-N VOLTAGE]
CN: 0.00 CA: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

[PHASE C-N VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[LINE A-B VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

[ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE] [POS SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE B-C VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[NEG SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE C-A VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag

Display measured values of voltage and voltage phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering
information of voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 227

09 kV 0.00 Hz 0.entecene.4.59 kV 359. frequency) You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE Display measured values of Synchronism Voltage.59 kV 59.0 Deg B:15.59 kV 0. NOTE : The “SYNCHRO VOLTAGE” menu screen can vary [SYNCHRO FREQUENCY] 50.00 Hz/Sec Frequency Display 10.0 Lag of Synchronism voltage. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information S:15. y Synchro Voltage(㎸) y Synchro Phasor(deg°) y Synchro Frequency(㎐) y Synchrocheck delta(Phasor.kr 10. y Frequency(㎐) y Frequency decay rate(㎐/Sec) You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY” MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY [FREQUENCY (Hz)] 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. [SYNCHRO DELTA] A: 0.00 Hz 228 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .59 kV 120.NT http://www.3.0 Lag Synchronism Delta.59 kV 240.1.9 Deg [SYNCHRO DELTA] 50. voltage.9 Deg C:15. Synchro Voltage The following values are contained in the synchronism voltage metering.co. Frequency and [SYNCHRO VOLTAGE] R:15.0 Lag T:15.00 Hz according to the EVRC2A version. Frequency The following values are contained in the frequency metering.1.

00 Pc: 0.NT http://www.00 Pb: 0.Second) y Positive varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute.00 P3: 0.entecene.0 Pc: 0. y Real power(MW) y Reactive power(Mvar) y Apparent power(MVA) y Power factor(%) You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER” MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER [REAL POWER (MW)] [REACTIVE POW(MVAR)] [APPARENT POW(MWA)] Pa: 0. 10.kr 10.0 P3: 0.6.00 Pb: 0.1. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 229 .00 [POWER FACTOR] Pa: 0.Second) y negative varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute.Second) The updated rate of the energy meters is based on the “Time Constant” setting “MAIN MENU / SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND” The meters will update every 1/15 of the Demand Constant. y Positive watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute. Power The following values are contained in the power metering.00 Pa: 0.Second) y Negative watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute. For example : if the Demand Constant is set to 15 minutes. the energy meters will update every 1 minute (15min × 1/15 = 1 min) The watt-hour and VAR-hour meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / ENERGY”.00 Pc: 0.00 Pc: 0. The “SD(start date)” on LCD indicates the time when the watt-hour and VAR-hour meters are reset.00 Pb: 0.00 Pa: 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.5.0 Display measured values of power and power factor per phase.1.0 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information of power.00 P3: 0.co. Energy The following values are contained in the energy metering.

Second).NT http://www. A time stamp in the following format (Date: Year/Month/Day and Time: Hour:Minute.Second) During each demand value.co. the EVRC2A also captures and stores maximum values for the measurements listed below. Use [▲] [▼] button to check energy information. Reactive power) and Date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute.kr You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY” MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY [POSITIVE W/H(MWh)] [POSITIVE V/H(MVar)] [NEGATIVE W/H(MWh)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 [NEGATIVE V/H(MVar)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 Display energy. the old value is replaced.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1. Actual demand & maximum demand with Value (Current. Real power. 10. The Max demand meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / MAX DEMAND” 230 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .7. is placed with the latest maximum values.entecene. It functions as a standard maximum meter. When a new maximum value is determined. Demand The following values are contained in the demand metering.

NT http://www.00 MW MAX : 0.kr You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / DEMEND” MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND [DEMAND CURRENT (A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE B CURRENT] A: 0 B: 0 DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A C: 0 G: 0 MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A SG: 0 I2: 0 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 [PHASE SG CURRENT] [PHASE G CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 [PHASE I2 CURRENT] [PHASE A REAL POWER] [PHASE B REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 [P-B REACTIVE POWER] [P-C REACTIVE POWER] [3P REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 231 . Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.00 MW MAX : 0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Real power and Reactive power Display.00 MWar MAX : 0.entecene.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 [P-A REACTIVE POWER] [3P REAL POWER (MW)] [PHASE C REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0 A MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0.co.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MWar 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 Demand Current.

y Board power(±12. SOURCE-VOLT: 0 LOAD-VOLT: 0 CURRENT: 0 NOTE : This menu is supported from version 6.%] Unbalance metering display. System The following values are contained in the system metering.44 GAS: 0.1.NT http://www.1.35 –12:-12.8.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. +5V) y Temperature(℃) y Battery voltage(V) y Gas pressure(Bar) NOTE : According to recloser type.00 10.9.12 of EVRC2A-N6.NT. +12:12. y Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Source Side y Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Load Side y Current unbalance(I2/I1) You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / UNBALANCE” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM [UNBALANCE.38 +5 : 5.co. Unbalance The following values are contained in the unbalance metering.12 TMP:27. there may be no gas pressure measurement.58 BAT:27.entecene. 232 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .kr 10. You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYSTEM” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM [ SYSTEM METER] System metering display.

Voltage-A >6.Current-B >4. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.Voltage-C THD You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD”. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 233 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD [Total Har’ Dis’(%)] This menu is to display the total harmonic distortion of current and >Ia : 0 Va : 0 >Ib : 0 Vb : 0 voltage.1.THD >2.Current-A >3. Harmonics The following values are contained in harmonics metering.Voltage-B >7.entecene. MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic of current through phase A.kr 10. >Ic : 0 Vc : 0 Current-A You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A”.NT http://www. >1. y 1st~7th Harmonic of Current y 1st~7th Harmonic of Voltage y THD of Current y THD of Voltage You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS” MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS [HARMONICS] Current and Voltage Harmonics display.Current-C >5.10.co.

NT http://www. Voltage -B(C) The same Menu as “Voltage-A” function. You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-B(C)”.kr Current-B(C) The same Menu as “Current-A” function.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-B(C)”. Voltage-A You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-A”. 234 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic and THD of voltage in phase A. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.co.

entecene. C POWER FACTOR Rate ±0.000 POWER 3Φ Phase 3ΦAPPARENT Phase A. 3Φ Real Power MW ±2% – A/B/C. 3Φ Reactive Power MVar ±2% ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 235 . C 3ΦREAL POWER MW ±2% –32. C MVA ±2% –32.co.000 to 32.NT http://www. B.000 3Φ Phase 3ΦREACTIVE Phase A. B. V2. 3V0 ㎸ ±1% Phase A.000 POWER 3Φ Phase Phase A. B.000 to 32.kr 10. C MVar ±2% –32. C VAR-HOURS MVarH ±2% –32000 to 32000 3Φ Phase Phase A/B/C/RG Current A ±2% DEMAND A/B/C.000 to 1.000 to 32.000 3Φ Phase Phase A. B.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. B. 3I0 A ±1% of 2×CT – COMPONENTS V1.02 –1. so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental components only. C WATT-HOURS MWH ±2% –32000 to 32000 3Φ Phase Phase A. B. Metering Accuracy(1/2) Measurements Parameters Unit Accuracy Range Phase A RMS Current Phase B RMS Current CURRENT Phase C RMS Current A ±1% of 2×CT 20×CT Phase G RMS Current Phase SEF RMS Current A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage VOLTAGE ㎸ ±1% – R–N (R–S) RMS Voltage S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage* T–N (T–R) RMS Voltage* SYMMETRICAL I1. I2. Table 10-1.2. Accuracy The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current parameters.

entecene.NT http://www.co. Metering Accuracy(2/2) Measurements Parameters Unit Accuracy Range A-N (A-B) Source Voltage FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.00 R-N (R-S) Load Voltage 1st~7th Harmonic of Current ±1% 0% to 100% st th 1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage ±1% 0% to 100% HARMONICS – THD of Current ±3% 0% to 100% THD of Voltage ±3% 0% to 100% Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side ±2% 0% to 999% UNBALANCE Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side % ±2% 0% to 999% Current unbalance(I2/I1) ±2% 0% to 999% If the VT connection type is set to delta.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.02 40. all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero. 236 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .kr Table 10-1.00~70.

1. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 237 . go to “MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS”. y COUNTERS y WEAR MONITOR y OUTPUT RELAY TEST y POWER QUALITY .3. The recorded counter items are below.Option 11. Counters EVRC2A records counter related with system operation. Recloser Wear Explanation”.kr 11.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. For more detail information. In order to check information of the recloser’s contact wear. In order to check counter information.NT http://www.entecene.2. Wear Monitor EVRC2A displays the each phase’s contact wear of the recloser. For more detail information.4. refer to “8. go to “MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”.1. Trip Counter Explanation”.co. y Trip y Fault y System Restart 11. refer to “8.1. MAINTENANCE EVRC2A has maintenance function for following items.

“END [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] TESTING”. go to “MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST” menu. SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press <FUN> : Start Press <ESC> : Cancel If the [ESC] button is press at ②. is shown and then back to the previous menu. Output Relay Test EVRC2A is capable to perform the output test of the relay output ports(1~8). MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST ① Select output signal at ① for testing. [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] Press [ENT] button and then ② is shown. If the test is completed. The output signal has ② been “asserted” for 2 sec.NT http://www. [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press <FUN> : Start TESTING ④ [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press <FUN> : Start TEST Canceled 238 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .kr 11. For the output test. ④ is shown and the output test is ③ canceled. SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press [FUN] button at ② and then ③ is shown.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.3. the message.entecene.

Option 11. Power Quality Explanation EVRC2A records the related number of times and duration when the outage or sag/swell/unbalance occurs.1. The time of outage is T-Time T-Cnt S: 0000/00/00 0000 displayed as hour/minute/second. C Phase: ⑦ ⑩ ⑪ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a source side. C Phase: 31029 31023 [PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE NOTE : The number of times and the hour do not increase SOURCE-VOLT : ⑪ LOAD-VOLT : ⑫ during the outage if the power of EVRC2A is off. Especially Supply Outage and Power Quality counter are operated depending on power quality function set in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu. A Phase: 31012 31003 B Phase: 31011 31002 ⑬ It indicates the number of current unbalance.4. User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/POWER QUALITY”. [PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL ⑫ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a load side.entecene.4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT. MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / POWER QUALITY [SUPPLY OUTAGE] ① It indicates the time of outage on a power source side.kr 11.C phase. L: 0000/00/00 0000 ④ It indicates the number of outage on a load side.NT http://www. SOURCE-VOLT : 000 LOAD-VOLT : 000 CURRENT : 000 NOTE : These counter for unbalance are supported from version 6.co. Power Quality . The CURRENT : ⑬ number of times and the hour of outage will be recorded [PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE by the end of outage.B. [PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL ⑤⑥⑦ They indicate the numbers of sag on A. [SUPPLY OUTAGE] ③ It indicates the time of outage on a load side.B. A Phase: ⑤ ⑧ B Phase: ⑥ ⑨ ⑧⑨⑩ They indicate the numbers of swell on A. The time of T-Time T-Cnt S: ① ② outage is displayed as hour/minute/second.C phase.12 of EVRC2A-N6. L: ③ ④ ② It indicates the number of times of outage on a power source side. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 239 .

P-Quality Count” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the Supply Outage Counter and Power Quality Counter.NT http://www.4. 2) Stored Value Clear Select “10.kr 11.10 Power Quality-Option”. Related Setting Menu 1) Function Setting For more details.2.entecene. 240 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. please refer to “6.

Option 12. Waveform Capture In case of Fault.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Waveform Capture records 32 Data of 15-Cycle with 16-Smple per 1 Cycle resolution.kr 12. EVENT RECORDER EVRC2A has recording function for following items. y FAULT CYCLE WAVEFORM CAPTURE y SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER y LOAD PROFILE y DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER y FAULT TRIP .Option y POWER QUALITY .entecene.co.1. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 241 . Fault cycle summary is displayed on LCD screen Captured fault waveforms can be showed by the interface software.

Ex> ② Fault Type .NT http://www. press [▲] key. 242 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene. Q: Negative Sequence Fault 10/01/01 19:51:58 . C.6. 81: Under Frequency Trip . G: Fault phase shows LED ON. 59: Over Voltage Trip . For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function. O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip. refer to “8. S: Sensitive Earth Fault IS: 0 IQ: 0 . [NO-①] Locate: --⑤ IS: ③ IQ: ③ ① Fault No: There are 32 events are recorded and the latest event is ④10/01/01 19:51:58 displayed in advance. Ⓑ On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ. Loss of Phase etc. Fault Pickup [NO-01] Fault Pickup IA: 0 IB: 0 . press [▼] key. B.kr MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE Ⓐ Move to ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE” to [NO-①] ② see Fault cycle summary IA: ③ IB: ③ IC: ③ IG: ③ y To see previous value. 27: Under Voltage Trip IC: 0 IG: 0 10/01/01 19:51:58 . [NO-01] Locate: --.co. A. . ④10/01/01 19:51:58 y To see next value.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.) ③ Each phase fault current unit : Ampere(A) ④ Event occurred time : Year/Month/Day(or Month/Day/Year) Hour: Minute: Second ⑤ Fault Location Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ON. Fault Locator”. Ⓑ screen in term.

then record pickup cycles. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 243 .NT http://www. Isef y 3 voltages (Va.1.1. Data Channels Stores following data : y 5 currents : Ia. Ig.3. Trigger Source y Occurred Protection element pickup y Occurred Fault trip command active Depending on pickup size. Related Setting Menu 1) ON/OFF Setting Fault Cycle waveform capture function can be set ON/OFF by user. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Fault Cycle [EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF. Ib.5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1.2. Vb.1. Sample Rate Captures one period of 16 sampling per cycle.1. These operations are very useful to examine. 12.1. if interval between pickup and trip is within 15 cycles including prefault cycles(4 cycles). OFF : No record of fault cycle waveform. Ic.kr 12. ON >Fault Cycle: ON Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~ Load Profile: ON ON : Record fault cycle waveform.entecene. 12. Storage capacity The capacity of storage is last 32 events of 15cycles.co. But if the interval between pickup and trip are not within 15 cycles. then record pickup cycles and trip cycles.4. 12. Vc) : not passed digital-filter y 85 logic input states y 8Ch output relays y 8Ch Inputs 12.

entecene. 12. Interface software Interface software shows Data and captured waveform (below) Figure 12-1.kr 2) Pre-fault length Setting User sets the length of pre-fault before Trigger.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.1.6. Data and captured waveform showed by Interface Software 244 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . FAULT CYCLE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / REALY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the stored value.co.NT http://www. 3) Stored Value Clear Select “1. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Len' of Pre F [EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14 Fault Cycle: ON >Len' of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1 Load Profile: ON Usually sets 4 cycles as default.

EVENT TEXT & DESCRIPTION”. Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert) 12.1.2.kr 12.entecene. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 245 . 12. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS [NO-0001] SLEEP MODE Confirm in STATUS : LO/DEASSERT DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS” TIME : 19:51:58:387 12. System Event Recorder Record changes of system status up to 2048 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted. refer to “Appendix C. V2(Load) y Power Quality detect NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source.2.SYSTEM STATUS” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.2. 12. 1) Stored Value Clear Select “2. User can clear only stored events.5. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains system event recorder. y V1(Source). Trigger Source y Protection Element y 52A Contact y Sequence status y Front panel control y AC supply y External control y Fail operation y External input status y System alarm etc. Storage Capacity Stores last 2048 events. Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.2.co.4. 12.3.2.2.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.2.NT http://www.

2. Interface software Interface software shows system status events.kr 12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.6. System Status Events showed by Interface Software 246 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.NT http://www.entecene. Figure 12-2.

3ф) y Demand Reactive Power(A. Positive Varhour(3ф) 12.3. 10. press [▼] key. 30. 15.0 10/01/22 21:45:00 12. 20.2. Storage Capacity y Stores 5120 events ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 247 . ③.entecene. Load Profile Record the Demand value when reaches in setting time (5. C.3. Trigger Source y Demand Current(A.3. Load profile has 5120 Banks that can store values of 213 days if setting time is 60minute. use [◀] or [▶] key to see ①. 10. ② y To see next value.0 MVh: 0. B. B.1. 20. ②. B. REAL POW(MW) [0001] y On screen ①.NT http://www. 30. C. G) y Demand Real Power(A. press [▲] key.kr 12.co. Trigger Time y 5. ④ screen in A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 3P: 0 term. 60 Minute 12. 3ф) y Demand Power Factor( 3ф) y Demand Energy . 60minute).RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. C.Positive Watthour(3ф). 10/01/22 21:45:00 ③ REAC POW(Mvar)[0001] A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 3P: 0 10/01/22 21:45:00 ④ PF&ENERGY-3P [0001] P-F(%) : 0. 15.3.0 MWh: 0.3. LOAD PROFILE ① CURRENT (A) [0001] Confirm in A: 0 B: 0 C: 0 G: 0 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / LOAD PROFILE” 10/01/22 21:45:00 y To see previous value.

30. 15. 60 min Len' of Pre F: 4 Load Profile: ON Default 15 Step ~ >L. 12. OFF : No record of load profile.5. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile [EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF. LOAD PROFILE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.4.entecene.P save time(m) [EVENT RECORDER] Range 5. 248 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co. ON Fault Cycle: ON Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~ >Load Profile: ON ON : Records load profile.kr 12.3. 2) Recording time interval setting PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.NT http://www. Stored value Clear Select “3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 20.P save time(m):15 Sets the interval time between Records.3. 10. Related Setting Menu 1) ON/OFF Setting Load Profile can be set ON/OFF by user.

Figure 12-3. Load Profile Data showed by Interface Software ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 249 . Interface software Interface software shows load profile data.6.kr 12.co.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.3.entecene.NT http://www.

NT http://www. 12. ±12V. NOTE ) According to a recloser type.3.kr 12.co. y NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source. EVENT TEXT & DESCRIPTION”.4. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle 12. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC [NO-001] GAS HIGH Confirm in STATUS : LO/DEASSERT DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC” TIME : 19:51:58:387 12.DIAGNOSTIC” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear. Battery. there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains Diagnostic event recorder. 1) Stored Value Clear Select “4. Trigger Source y SYSTEM POWER : AC.4. 250 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Diagnostic Event Recorder Record diagnostic events up to 512 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.4. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.4. User can clear only stored events. +5V y A/D Conversion : A/D Fail.2.entecene.1. 12.4.4. Reference Voltage 2 y POWER DOWN MODE y GAS STATUS etc ※. Reference Voltage1. refer to “Appendix C. Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert) 12.5.

Interface software Interface software shows Diagnostic events.4.kr 12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. Figure 12-4.6.entecene. Diagnostic Events showed by Interface Software ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 251 .NT http://www.

press [▲] key.co. O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip. ⑤10/01/01 00:00:00 On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ. SEF current. 27: Under Voltage Trip . 81: Under Frequency Trip . C and G phase currents. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP Ⓐ Confirm in “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP”. Q: Negative Sequence Overcurrent Trip . G: G phase Overcurrent Trip . 10/01/01 00:00:00 [001/1] ABCG IS: 0 IQ: 0 10/01/01 00:00:00 12. B: B phase Overcurrent Trip . [①/②] ③ y To see previous value. fault time and fault current of each phase are recorded. ⑤10/01/01 00:00:00 Total 512 events can be stored. C: C phase Overcurrent Trip .Option When fault trip occurs. 59: Over Voltage Trip .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. [001/1] ABCG ④ Display current of each phase when fault occurs. B. Ex> ③ Display fault type. Trigger Source y Target elements . S: Sensitive Earth Overcurrent Trip . Fault Trip Event Recorder . Ⓑ screen in term. Loss of Phase etc.5. press [▼] key. ② Display fault sequence(shot counter). IA: ④ IB: ④ IC: ④ IG: ④ y To see next value.NT http://www.entecene.) y fault current[A]: A .kr 12. A: A Phase Overcurrent Trip . Negative Sequence current 252 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .5. IA: 0 IB: 0 IC: 0 IG: 0 ⑤ Display fault time.1. Ⓑ [①/②] ③ ① Display the order of the fault trip occurrence and events from the IS: ④ IQ: ④ most recent fault to the oldest fault.

1) Stored Value Clear Select “9.4. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.entecene.5.co. Fault Trip” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.5. 12.3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Figure 12-5. Fault Trip Events showed by Interface Software ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 253 .5.kr 12. User can clear only stored events. 12. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle 12.5. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains fault trip event recorder. Interface software Interface software shows Fault Trip events.2.5.NT http://www.

When the outage is detected. Total 512 events can be stored.NT http://www. UBC : Current Unbalance ③ Displays the duration of outage as in hour/ minute/second and cycle message added after duration. OUTAGE-S : power supply side outage TIME : 00:00:00:000 . OT: 0000 h 00 m 00 s DATE : 10/01/01 .Option EVRC2A always monitors the voltage on both power source side and load side.6.C) : A(B. it also records the occurrence time of sag/swell event and unbalance event. Power Quality Event Recorder .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. swell or unbalance detected. SWL-A(B.C) phase sag.co. EVRC2A records the outage time and duration. sag. 254 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . and records the data of power outage in order to analyze the cause when the outage is detected on either side.entecene. ④ Displays the time of outage.C) : A(B. TIME : ⑤ . Power Quality event can be viewed at “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY” MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY ① Displays the order of the event occurrence and events from the most recent event to the oldest event. [NO-001] OUTAGE-S ② Displays the event type and detect value.C) phase swell. UBL-SV : Voltage Unbalance on source side . Besides. UBL-LV : Voltage Unbalance on load side . OUTAGE-L : load side outage [NO-①] ② . OT: ③ DATE : ④ . SAG-A(B.kr 12. NOTE : It does not record outage or sag/swell event if the power of EVRC2A was off during the outage.

4.Load side Voltage . Interface software All the supply outage events can be viewed at interface software.1. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle 12. Select “11.Source side Voltage .6.” 2) Stored Value Clear System automatically maintains power quality event recorder.NT http://www. Trigger Source y Target elements . User can clear only stored events.4.6. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.5. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 255 . P-Quality Event” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.2. 12.3. Source Outage . 12.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.2 Related Setting Menu.6. Sag/Swell . Related Setting Menu 1) Function and Outage duration Settings Refer to menu.co.Current 12.6. Voltage Unbalance . Current Unbalance y Monitoring elements .entecene.kr 12. “11. Load Outage .6.

kr Figure 12-6.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Power Quality Events showed by Interface Software 256 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .entecene.co.NT http://www.

Inner Structure” ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 257 .To open the door. pull the handle.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Turning on either one of two activates control. you see 2 Switches.NT http://www. right side one is for AC Power. User Interface Door and Power Switch Figure 13-1.co. Control Power Switch After opening the User Interface Door.kr 13. User Interface Door and Power Switch User Interface Door User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom). AC Power Outlet For user convenience. Left side switch is for Battery Power. Fuse is installed for safety from overload.1.entecene. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. INSTALLATION 13.

258 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Air Vent and Outer Cover Outer Cover It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle.kr 13. The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.2. Air Vent To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.NT http://www.entecene. Vents are on left and right side covered with Outer Cover. Vent and Outer Cover Figure 13-2.

entecene. EVR2. Large size is available for EVR3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan y EVRC2A has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type. the space unit is referred to “Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions” ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 259 . Dimensions and Mounting Plan Figure 13-3. y Small size is available for EVR1.3.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co.NT http://www.kr 13. y Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger.

co. y The diameter of the hole is 22㎜(0. EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series can be extended.NT http://www. y EVRC2A should be fixed top and bottom with 16㎜(5/8") Bolt. y There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning hardware.5㎸) / EVR2 (27㎸) / EVR3 (38㎸) y For installation on a Pole. the lifting hole is indicated. y EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.kr y Standard for EVR1.entecene. 260 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . y Weight of EVRC2A small size is 85㎏ and large size is 90㎏.

co. Earth Wiring Diagram Figure 13-4.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.kr 13.4. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 261 .entecene. y Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0. connect the ground.470") diameter.NT http://www. Earth Wiring Diagram y After installation of Control cubicle. y Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A Earth Terminal must be connected to the ground.

TF2. Inner Structure Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker) Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac(or 110Vac – option).20. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6. Fuse TF1.co. User Available Space Space for additional hardware connection. there are two ports for user.5. Heater Optional Heater is 40W Battery Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Fuse”) Terminal Block Place for AC Power line. 262 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Mount Accessories Dimensions”. Inner Structure Figure 13-5. refers to (see “13.kr 13.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Use (+) screwdriver for replacement. TF3 are for circuit protection.entecene.NT http://www.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Mount Accessories Dimensions Figure 13-6. y On Base plate. y Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6㎜ (4”) to 177.8㎜ (7”) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 263 .kr 13. Mount Accessories Dimensions y Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space. 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.entecene.NT http://www.co.6.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W.5Vdc 60W 60second (1-VCC/+) 12Vdc 11. there is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure. and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). y When overload.kr 13.co.NT http://www. User-Available DC Power Table 13-1. contact manufacturer. User-Available DC Power Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions 24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 40W Continuous Side Panel CN5 15Vdc 14. disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3 “Figure 13-31. additional power should be attached. ANALOG BOARD”. For more details.0∼15. automatically circuit breaks current. With using (+) CN5 connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12. Input of the additional power is referred to “Figure 13-7. In case long-term overload time.7.0∼12.5Vdc Short 1second (2-AGND/-) Standard Voltage : 12Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating y 30W DC Power is provided.315"). 264 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Be sure of the voltage rating due to disassembly. Terminal Block and Fuses” y Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.entecene. y To change Voltage ratings.

8. white wired line is for Phase wire. y Standard AC Power is 220Vac(Optional AC Power is 110Vac).entecene. 8 are spare for Recloser 52 contact. y In AC line connection. Terminal Block and Fuses Figure 13-7. 7.co. Terminal Block and Fuses y Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block. 5 are for connecting additional AC Power.3A ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 265 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. y Terminal 9. Terminal 3 is the ground. AC Power Outlet is connected with 40W Heater. blue wired line is for Neutral.NT http://www. 2 are connected from Receptacle to Terminal block. 52 Contact Auxiliary Specs Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0. Reference for branching. use User Available Space. Terminal 4 is connected with TF3 for protection. In need of more terminals. green wired line is for the ground.kr 13.6A / 250Vdc 0. terminal 5 is in series with AC Power y On TF3 Fuse. 10 are for User Available Terminal block. y Terminal 6. y Terminal 4. y AC Power input terminal 1.

EVRC2A Wiring Diagram .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. y CN1 has different system wirings depending on User system. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram . CN1 is marked as Earthing System.kr 13. y VT type is standard and VD type is for optional. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram” y CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. 266 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .VD Type” is VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) type and “Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram .VT Type” is VT type. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram .VD Type”.9. refer to “Figure 13-11. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type Figure 13-8.VD Type y Wiring diagram of EVRC2A standard. In “Figure 13-8. For non-Earthing system. VD type and VT type are not exchangeable. “Figure 13-8.entecene.co.NT http://www.

VT Type Figure 13-9. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 267 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.NT http://www.entecene.10.co.VT Type y “Figure 13-9. VT type is standard and VD type is optional.kr 13. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram . EVRC2A Wiring Diagram . VT Wiring Diagram” y VD type and VT type are not exchangeable. y CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram .VT Type” is wiring diagram of VT type of which Voltage Input is optional. refer to “Figure 13-13. For wiring.

entecene. 2) Remove the coating of cable length of 8㎜ (0.Option SERIAL RS232 PORT3 . Side Panel Current Inputs IA. Side panel connector for user should be connected to Wire size AWG24 to 12 Figure 13-10.315").VC.IC.Option SERIAL RS485/422 PORT4 .VB.11.NT http://www.Option ETHERNET NOTE : 1) I/O Terminal (CN10. Close.VS.kr 13. Side Panel 268 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .IB. VR. CN9) has functions to control basic operation of Recloser and can be connected with SCADA System for use. Pressure CN9 CN10 OUTPUTS and INPUTS . Lock.SEF CN2 Voltage Inputs VA. VT CN3 AC24V IN Relay Module AC Power Input CN4 BATT` IN Relay Module DC Power Input CN5 POWER OUT . OUT6~OUT7(B Contact) OUT8(ALARM) IN01~IN08 PORT2 .Option OUT1~OUT5(A Contact).co. Close CN7 UPS Monitors and controls Close and Trip Power CN8 RECLOSER STATUS Open.Option User-Available DC Voltage Source CN6 CONTROL Recloser Open.IN.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

co. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 269 .05A) Figure 13-11.kr 13.A08) should be connected to each other.NT http://www.A10) should be connected.16A Continuous y 0. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Current IG is connected with Side Panel IG(A07. Non Earthing System.A08) in Earthing System.5A) Current IG should be connected with SEF(A09. Phase Rotation” CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.19VA(0.entecene.A10) of Side Panel in. Refer to “Figure 13-14.5A Nominal y 2A continuous y 25A 1 second y Burden : 0.0375VA(0.12.6A 1 second y Burden : 0. SEF(A09. SEF Input Current Range y 0. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Recloser Phase should match with User system.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. so called “JUMPER” IG Input Current Range y 0. IG(A07.05A Nominal y 0.

entecene. 27㎸ Class 270 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . y Option CVD 15㎸. If CT Inputs changed Phase rotation. VD Wiring Diagram y VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures Voltage with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser. 27㎸.co. Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged. 38㎸ Class y Option RVD 15㎸.13. VD Wiring Diagram Figure 13-12. y Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. y VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.kr 13.NT http://www.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.

VS. y Voltage Inputs VA.2VA(220V).kr 13.14.05VA(120V). 0.entecene. VT Wiring Diagram Figure 13-13.6VA(300V).02VA(67V) ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 271 .NT http://www. y VT wiring should match Current Inputs. VR. VT Wiring Diagram y VD(CVD or RVD) Type can not be used when VT(Voltage Transformer) Type was selected. 0. VB.co. VC.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. 0. VT „ Input Voltage Range : Vphase-Vcom Continuous < 300V „ Burden : 0.

Phase Rotation y For Metering accuracy.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. y “Figure 13-14. y EVR Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side. 272 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .co.entecene. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation Figure 13-14. y If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser. phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.NT http://www. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser.kr 13. correct CT and VD(CVD or RVD) wiring in side panel to be matched.15.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin Function Pin Function A C.entecene.T Phase B b 52b(Auxiliary) C C.co.16.5”) y Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R” ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 273 .T Phase C a 52 common(Auxiliary) B C.kr 13.T Phase A c 52a(Auxiliary) D C.T Common(G) d Close and Trip Coil Common E VD Source Phase C e Close and Trip Coil Common F VD Source Phase B f Close and Trip Coil Common G VD Source Phase A g Close Coil H VD Load side Phase T h Close Coil J VD Load side Phase S j Close Coil K VD Load side Phase R k not connected L Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) m Trip Coil M not connected n not connected N Pressure Sensor Power AGND p Trip Coil P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc r Trip Coil R Cable shield and Ground s not connected S not connected T Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect) U Recloser Status Common(24Vdc) V Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip) W Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close) X not connected Z not connected y Control EVRC2A Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female) y Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male) y Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.NT http://www.

kr Figure 13-15.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A.entecene.co. Control Receptacle “Figure 13-15. 274 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .NT http://www.

Recloser Receptacle Figure 13-17. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin Function A AC Power Input B AC Power Input (Neutral) C not connected Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2A is 220Vac(110Vac – option). y For Control Cable assembling. do the opposite way of Control Cable assembling Figure 13-16. Power Receptacle ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 275 .18. Control Cable 13. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling y Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling. connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 13-3.entecene. „ Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle. „ Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.17. Following notices are suggested.co. „ Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling. Figure 13-18.NT http://www. repeat this to complete connection.kr 13.

787" 2A Relay Module Power (Analog board) (5×20)㎜ Inside Relay Module F4 0.385×31.385×31.25×1.25" Input Line of Transformer in Terminal Block TF2 6A/110Vac (6.kr 13.197"×0.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.385×31.787" 1A Close Control (Analog board) (5×20)㎜ Inside Relay Module F3 0.197"×0.co.75)㎜ Module AC Power 3A/220Vac 0.19.NT http://www. Fuses Rating / Positions Dimensions Purpose External AC .entecene.75)㎜ User Available AC Power Inside Relay Module F1 0.197"×0.75)㎜ Control EVRC2A AC Power.25"×1.787" 1A Trip Control (Analog board) (5×20)㎜ Inside Relay Module F2 0. Fuses Table 13-4. AC Power Cable TYPE : MS22-2S(Female) Cable Length : 2C-3.25"×1.197"×0.25" AC Power outlet and Heater Terminal Block TF3 10A (6. 0.25" Input Line of Transformer in UPS Terminal Block TF1 15A/110Vac (6.20.Power Input 7A/220Vac 0.787" 5A User-Available DC Power (Analog board) (5×20)㎜ 276 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .5㎟ 6meter(236") A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase) B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral) C PIN : not connected 13.

Relay Module supplies through CN4 Connector in Side Panel and UPS Module supplies through P2 Connector of UPS Module.21. Battery Circuit Voltage” y Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. y 24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through NFB1(Battery Switch). y Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to battery switch NFB1. the residual capacity is 0%.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. The self-discharge rate varies with ambient temperature. use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series. In order to store Battery for a long time. y Sealed lead . The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance. y The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of +20℃(+68℉).5Vdc.acid Battery Type. Battery Specs Nominal capacity 24V/17A (12V×2pcs) Service life Time 5 years Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R Controller run time 40hours Recharge Time SOC: ~80%/ 15hours NOTE : Battery capacity can be changed by request of a user. Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery voltage. Figure 13-20. turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.kr 13.co. Open Circuit Voltage ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 277 . Open Figure 13-19. If the battery voltage is less than 22.NT http://www. Battery and Control run time Table 13-5. y The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-20.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.22. Charge Circuit
Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge.
Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has.
Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power
switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10Ω in series with
CD Ammeter.

Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V)
Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc)

NOTE : The battery charger is fully temperature compensated.
Battery charger capacity can be changed by request of a user.

13.23. Battery Change
Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and
is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Reference “Figure 13-19. Battery”

13.24. Battery Protection
Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from
the control circuit when AC power is lost and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU
measures the battery voltage and when the battery is below 21 volts, timer is operated and after
10 minutes, Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit.
On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from
OFF to ON, Control Module is operated as normal.
When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, OFF for 5 seconds and
turn it ON. When it is turned ON without Battery, it is Power downed after 10 minutes.

278 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.25. Communications
1) RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Table 13-6. RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Pin Serial Port1 Serial Port2 Definition
1 N/C DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RXD RXD Receive Data
3 TXD TXD Transmit Data
4 N/C DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND GND Ground
6 N/C DSR Data Set Ready
7 N/C RTS Request To Send
8 N/C CTS Clear To Send
9 N/C N/C No Connection
Positions User Interface Panel(Male) Side Panel (Male)
Cable CC201 CC201,202,203

Purposes Maintenance DNP
Figure 13-21. RS232 Port

2) RS232/485 Pin Functions for Port3

Figure 13-22. Port 3

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 279

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 13-7. PORT3(RS-232/RS485) Pin Description
Pin(RS-232) Signal Description Pin(RS-485) Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 RS485+
2 RXD Receive Data(IN) 2 RS485-
3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT) 3 SG (Cable Shield)
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT) 4 485 ON
5 GND Ground 5 485 ON
6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)
7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)
8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)
9 N/C No Connection

※. Note) ① PORT3 provides RS-485 communication and uses Digital power and insulated
power of CPU Part for surge protection. Each terminal is Anti-Over-voltage.
② To minimize the noise of communication line, Terminal Resistor is used in the both
end of the line and Twisted Shied Cable is advisable for connecting cable.
③ In order to use RS-485, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 Port should be connected.

3) RJ-45 Pin Functions for Port4
Table 13-8. RJ-45Pin Functions for Port4
Pin Port4 Pin Port4
1 TX+ 6 N/C
2 TX- 7 N/C
3 RX+ 8 N/C
4 RX- Purpose IEC60870-5-104
5 N/C Figure 13-23. RJ-45 Port

280 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.26. Communication Cables
1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer

Figure 13-24. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)

2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-25. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)

3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-26. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 281

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.27. Hardware Block Diagram

Figure 13-27. Hardware Block Diagram

282 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

Figure 13-28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

CC Close Coil TC Trip Coil
MC Magnetic Contactor C Capacitor
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor F Fuse
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

y Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1, C2, C3 in UPS module.
y C1 is used for Trip power, C2, C3 are used for Close power.
y Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power
to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
y F1, F2 are Fuses to protect IGBT from MC damage. These are on Analog Board.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 283

y Transformer in EVRC2A connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac. UPS Module Block Diagram y UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. y Trip and Close Capacitor are individually located and do not affect to each other during Trip and Close. y Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. 284 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .29. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac.entecene.co. runs over 20Vdc.NT http://www. y UPS Module runs by 120Vac Power or by Backup Battery.kr 13.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close Figure 13-29. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.

NT http://www. Main Board Figure 13-30.entecene.co. Also indicates backup battery type.kr 13. MAIN BOARD Indicates Firmware Upgrade Port. and main parts location. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 285 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.30. RTC(Real Time Clock).

y F1. JP2.31. defining User Available DC Power Output Rating. y JP1.entecene.NT http://www. JP2. Analog Board Figure 13-31. 286 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . ANALOG BOARD y JP1. F2 are use to protect IGBT for Close and Trip.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.co. JP3 are Jumper Connectors and define User Available DC Power rating. JP3 are Jumper Connecter. y F3 is for Relay Module protection.kr 13.

Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram Figure 13-32. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 287 .co. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram y CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected. y The capacity of CVD is 20㎊.32.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene.kr 13. and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.NT http://www.

Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram Figure 13-33.kr 13. 288 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .33. y The resistance of RVD is 100MΩ. and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.NT http://www.entecene.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram y CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.co.

entecene. Current Transformer (CT) Description Pin Function A C.T Phase A D C. G CVD Source Phase A 2) CVD Capacitance : 20㎊ H CVD Load side Phase T 3) For CVD Protection.35.co. and measure MOV voltage.NT http://www. MOV is connected between H CVD Load side Phase T Phase and Ground. MOV is connected between J CVD Load side Phase S Phase and Ground. J CVD Load side Phase S y For voltage measuring.T Phase C CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) B C. K CVD Load side Phase R R Cable shield and Ground EPR RECLOSER E RVD Source Phase C 1) Pin R is connected to Ground.T Common(G) 13.34. Figure 13-34. Capacitor Voltage Divider (VD) Description Pin Function E CVD Source Phase C EVR RECLOSER F CVD Source Phase B 1) Pin R is connected to Ground. (measure a voltage between MOV arms) y Voltage Measuring Method 2 Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. F RVD Source Phase B 2) RVD Resistance : 10MΩ G RVD Source Phase A 3) For RVD Protection. R Cable shield and Ground y Voltage Measuring Method 1 measure MOV voltage. VD Wiring Diagram ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 289 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.T Phase B CT Resistance < 5Ω C C. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) Table 13-10.kr 13. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) Table 13-9. use High Impedance AC K CVD Load side Phase R Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.

TYPE1 Sensor It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) 13.1. Table 13-11.entecene.5 %) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc 2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) 3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density). Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage” shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on pressure.co.36. 5) EVR has 0. 4) “Figure 13-35.NT http://www. EVR Pressure Sensor Description Pin Function L Pressure Sensor Output 1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pin P(+12Vdc±0.kr 13. 2005.36. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage 290 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.5bar at 20 ℃ Figure 13-35.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.entecene. EVR Pressure Sensor Description Pin Function L Pressure Sensor Output 1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc 2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) 5.9 1.0 4. TYPE2 Sensor It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY.co.4 -0.0 3.7 -0.1 0. Table 13-12.3 0.6 0. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 291 .36.6 -0.7 0.0 0.5 0.3 -0.0 1.0 0.5 Output voltage(Vdc) 3.5 0.4 0.kr 13.0 Pressure (bar) Figure 13-36.8 -0.2 0.8 0.5 -0.5 1.0 -0.2.5 2.2 -0.5 4. 2005.1 0.NT http://www.0 2.

NT http://www.37. e Close and Trip Coil Common 2) Pin g.38. Trip and Close Coil Description Pin Function d Close and Trip Coil Common 1) Pin d. Recloser Trip and Close Coil Table 13-14.co. e and f are combined as one line.entecene. W 52a(Monitored Close) a 52 common(Auxiliary) b 52b(Auxiliary) c 52a(Auxiliary) 13.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact Table 13-13. j Close Coil 4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5Ω m Trip Coil 5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2Ω p Trip Coil r Trip Coil 292 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . h and j are combined and placed as one f Close and Trip Coil Common line g Close Coil 3) Pin m.kr 13. p and r are combined and placed as one h Close Coil line. 52 contact and 69 contact Description Pin Function T 69b(Monitored locked) U Common(52 and 69) V 52b(Monitored Trip) 69 is b Contact when unlocked.

krr 13. Stan ndard Ratinggs and Featu ures CLA ASSIFICATION N RATINGS AND A FEATUR RES 1.RECLOS SER CONTR ROL EVRC2A A-N6. F Figure 13-377.RTS S2010 Stan ndard Ratin ngs and Features Tablee 13-15.enttecene. Externaal Mode.2kg(caable). 2) RTS R 2010 cann display Fuull Sequence of Trip timee. 1. Interval oon LCD screeen and allso can varioously test Callibration Moode.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω) Currrent output 4.co. Recloser Test Te Kit .4mA A) 7Vrms ×4cch (Burden ov ver 1㏀) Voltaage output Accuracy ( 1% or 0.02V V) BI01~02: DC12~150V D or o Dry contactt(User select) Binaary input BI03~04: DC12~150V(P D Pulse below 1sec) BO01~04 Binaary output 130mA/3500V. 6kg AL Case 325×150×270 (RTS201 10) Dim mensions 521×258×348 (AL CASE) Conttrol Interface Cable 2M Operrating Temperrature -20∼+50℃ AC180~2664 @ Select AC220V Pow wer input AC 90~1322 @ Select AC C110V Max. OCR Mo ode.39. Mannual Mode.NT http p://www. Re ecloser Test Kit 1) RTS R 2010 Moodel tests EV VRC2A by Faault Simulatiion. Trip currennt. ON Resistance (below 35 Ω) Timee Accuracy ±5ms Weigght 6kg(RTS20010).. 150W W ENHA ANCED TEC CHNOLOGY Y 293 .5Arms×1ch (3ch Paraallel) Accuracy ( 1% or 0.

Check System power cable fault (Value ≦11V.6V. or ≧-11V) 3. Replace UPS Module System power 1. SYS ALARM display 1. or ≧ 2. SYS ALARM display 1.entecene. Check System power cable fault (Value ≦4. SYS ALARM display 1. Protection disabled 2. SYS ALARM display Replace A/D Converter Module 2. Check AC Power NFB 2. or ≧13V) 3. Warning Events In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects. 3. Check battery NFB - NO BATTERY (Value < 15V) 2. Check System power cable fault (Value ≦-13V.4V) 3. SYS ALARM display Replace A/D Converter Module 2.co. Check AC Power fuse Battery Discharge 1) BATTDISCHG . +12V FAIL display 2. MAINTANANCE 14. Replace UPS Module A/D converter 1. Check System power connection 1) +12V FAIL +12V FAIL 2. REF2V FAIL display System power 1. Protection disabled 4) Reference voltage 1 REF1V FAIL FAIL (Value ≦2. BATT DISCHG display BATT FAIL - Battery 2.7V) A/D converter 1. Check AC supply. Check System power connection 2) +5 V FAIL +5V FAIL 2.NT http://www. Check battery connection 1.1. Check System power connection 3) -12V FAIL -12V FAIL 2.kr 14. Replace Battery charge T. Protection disabled 2. -12V FAIL display SYSTEM 4. Replace Analog Module Battery Discharge or No 1. Check AC supply Battery charge circuit 2.7V) 294 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY . Warning Events(1/2) USER’ RECOMMENDED EVENT EVENT TEXT EXPLANATION EVR2A ACTION ACTION 1. Check AC Power fuse External power FAIL - LO/DEASSERT 3. Check AC supply. +5 V FAIL display SYSPW FAIL System power FAIL 3. ensure AC - connector is securely connected 1. Check AC Power NFB AC POWER 2.3V. REF1V FAIL display POWER 5. or ≧5.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.or≧ 2. Protection disabled 5) Reference Voltage 2 REF2V FAIL FAIL (Value≦2. SYS ALARM display 1. ensure AC (15V < Value ≦ 21V) connector is securely connected 4. Table 14-1. NO BATTERY display 1. Protection disabled 2. Protection disabled 2. Check Battery charge Voltage CHGBD FAIL FAIL - (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V) (Value ≦25V) 3.R 2) NO Battery 1.3V. Replace UPS Module System power 1.

ORER-ALM Trip Counter Alarm - Ect. 2.RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6. Warning Events(2/2) EVENT USER’ RECOMMENDED EVENT EXPLANATION EVR2A ACTION TEXT ACTION POWER DOWN SYS ALARM display No problem POWER DOWN Power down mode MODE Protection disabled 1. Replace Main Processing Module FAIL Setting Communication Communication restart Replace Communication Module COMMUNICATION C-BD FAIL Option Board FAIL AD BUSY A/D Conversion BUSY SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module 1. SYS ALARM display 1. 200. Store Value Clear 2. and 0 sec.entecene. 2. Change to Default Setting MEMORY R-RAM FAIL RTC NV RAM FAIL SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module 1. on Jan. Replace Main Processing Module 1. 0 min. SYS ALARM display 1. RTC BAT LO RTC Battery LOW SYS ALARM display Replace RTC Battery 1. GAS STATUS 1. Opteional) connected Gas pressure Low GAS LOW 2. Main Contact Wear 1. Replace Recloser. Replace Recloser. Set up time & data at RTC FAIL RTC Time FAIL 0 hr. Change to Default 3. Check Recloser. No problem Parallel EEPROM SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module P-ROM FAIL FAIL SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module Serial EEPROM S-ROM FAIL FAIL D-RAM FAIL Data RAM FAIL SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module 1. Check Control cable fault (Value > 1. Execute All Clear Event I-VAL FAIL Initial Value FAIL 2.kr Table 14-1.NT http://www. Replace Recloser No problem SETTING SET CHANGE Setting Changed - RESTART System restarted .Ensure Control cable is securely connected Gas pressure High GAS HIGH . Execute System Restart 3. SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module 2. 1. No problem SYSTEM RESTART COLD RST Cold Restarted . Execute System Restart Initial Setting Value I-SET FAIL 2.co. Check Control cable fault (Value < 0. WEAR-ALM - Alarm 2.1 Bar) 3.5 Bar) 3.Ensure Control cable is securely (*. Replace Main Processing Module 4. Check Recloser. Replace Relay Module 4.. Replace Recloser. SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module S-RAM FAIL Setting RAM FAIL 2. ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 295 .

Figure 13-10 .NT http://www. Malfunction Events The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and what they indicate. control Box inside CN2 connection state check Voltage measure . control Box inside CN8 connection state check .Figure 13-8 . control Box inside CN6 connection state check .Table 13-2 .Table 13-2 .entecene.2.Figure 13-9 OPERATION FAIL Operation Fail ..Table 13-2 . Table 14-2. Replace Recloser 1 Connection state of control cable 2. It also suggests steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was generated.Figure 13-15 Reference 296 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY .Figure 13-8 .Figure 13-9 Control Cable .Figure 13-8 .kr 14. control Box inside FUSE state check Etc.That control switch point of contact check 2.Figure 13-9 . Malfunction Events EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION 1 Connection state of control cable 2. . Replace Relay Module 4.Figure 13-8 .Figure 13-31 Reference 3.Figure 13-9 Fail of current & .co.Figure 13-10 .Figure 13-10 .RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6.Figure 13-15 Reference 3. control Box inside CN1 connection state check Current measure .Figure 13-15 Reference Control Cable voltage measurement 1 Connection state of control cable 2.Figure 13-10 Reference 1.